Manual 2006 Accord Coupe

2006 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................3
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................53
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................105
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................183
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................197
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................219
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................263
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................287
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................301
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................305
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
０５／０７／２７１５：２６：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３００００１
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be

considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS
STREET This owner’s manual covers all
models of the Accord Coupe. You
may find descriptions of equipment
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ and features that are not on your
POSTAL CODE particular model.
V. I. N.
The information and specifications
DELIVERY DATE included in this publication were in
(Date sold to original retail purchaser) effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
ADDRESS or design at any time without notice
STREET and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
０５／０７／２７１５：２６：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３００００２
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Accord was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights WARNING: This product contains
and responsibilities. or emits chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the and birth defects or other
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves reproductive harm.
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique Event Data Recorders
to your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will
be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i
０５／０７／２７１５：２６：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３００００３
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
０５／０７／２７１５：２７：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３００００６
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.55,56)

GAUGES (P.63)
AUDIO SYSTEM (P.124)
DRIVER’S FRONT CLOCK (P.173)
AIRBAG (P.9, 23)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.95) FRONT PASSENGER’S
AIRBAG (P.9, 23)
POWER DOOR LOCK

MASTER SWITCH HEATING/COOLING
(P.77) CONTROLS
(P.108)
POWER WINDOW CLIMATE CONTROL
SWITCHES SYSTEM
(P.91) (P.113, 117)
FUEL FILL DOOR(P.185)/

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE HOOD RELEASE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.203)
(P.81) HANDLE MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.200)
A/T model is shown. (P.186)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS (P.100)
3
０５／０７／２７１５：２７：１６３１ＳＤＰ６３００００７
Main Menu
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS PASSENGER

HEADLIGHTS/ (P.71) (P.68) AIRBAG OFF
TURN SIGNALS INDICATOR
(P.69) (P.29)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS HAZARD
(P.171) WARNING
BUTTON
MOONROOF SWITCH＊2 (P.71)
(P.94)
CRUISE
CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES＊3 (P.175)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
＊1
HORN (P.72)
VEHICLE STABILITY TILT/TELESCOPIC SEAT HEATERS＊2

ASSIST OFF SWITCH＊2 ADJUSTMENT (P.90)
(P.212) (P.73)
EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.
＊1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊2 : If equipped.
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
０５／０７／２７１５：２７：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３００００８
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Safety Precautions .... 16 All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Additional Information About Back Seat .................................. 33
yourself and your passengers. It Your Seat Belts ........................ 17 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt System Components ... 17 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 33

explains how your airbags work. And Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 18 If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Automatic Seat Belt Children .................................... 35
infants and children in your vehicle. Tensioners ................................ 19 If a Child Requires Close
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 19 Attention ................................... 35
Additional Information About Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Your Airbags ............................ 21 Protecting Infants and Small
Airbag System Components ....... 21 Children .................................... 37
How Your Front Airbags Work ......... 23 Protecting Infants ........................ 37
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26 Protecting Small Children .......... 38
How Your Side Curtain Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Airbags Work ........................... 28 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28 With LATCH ................................ 41
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 43
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 Indicator Works ....................... 29 With a Tether ............................... 45
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 How the Passenger Airbag Protecting Larger Children ............ 46
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 Off Indicator Works ................ 29 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 46
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13 Airbag Service .............................. 30 Using a Booster Seat ................... 47
5. Fasten and Position the Additional Safety Precautions .... 31 When Can a Child Sit in Front ... 48
Seat Belts .............................. 14 Protecting Children − General Additional Safety Precautions .... 49
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ................................. 32 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 50
Position ................................. 15 All Children Must Be Safety Labels .................................... 51
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 15 Restrained ................................ 32
5
０５／０７／２７１５：２７：３５３１ＳＤＰ６３００００９
Main Menu Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained Control Your Speed
most important. in a child seat. Larger children Excessive speed is a major factor in
should use a booster seat and a lap/ crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt shoulder belt until they can use the the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in belt properly without a booster seat risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see pages 32 − 49). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passengers can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 14 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Don’t Drink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even maintenance (see page 221 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
０５／０７／２７１５：２７：４４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１０
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(3) (10) (8) (9) (6) (4) features that work together to
(9) protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

(1) Some features do not require any
(7) action on your part. These include a
(6) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(2)
(7) However, you and your passengers
(5) (11) can’t take full advantage of these
(1) Safety Cage features unless you remain sitting in
(2) Crush Zones a proper position and always wear
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(5) Collapsible Steering Column features can contribute to injuries if
(6) Seat Belts they are not used properly.
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags The following pages explain how you
(10) Door Locks can take an active role in protecting
(2) (11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners yourself and your passengers.
7
０５／０７／２７１５：２７：５９３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１１
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
includes an indicator on the though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
fasten your seat belts. passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Why Wear Seat Belts injury from an inflating airbag and
Seat belts are the single most allows you to get the best
effective safety device for adults and When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
in child seats.) so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
Not wearing a seat belt properly can reduce your risk of serious
increases the chance of serious Help protect you in almost every injury.
injury or death in a crash, even type of crash, including frontal,
though your vehicle has airbags. side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do:
rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
In addition, most states and all make sure you wear it properly.
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
8
０５／０７／２７１５：２８：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１２
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle has side airbags to help Your vehicle also has side curtain
restraint system (SRS) with front protect the upper torso of the driver airbags to help protect the heads of
airbags to help protect the heads and or a front seat passenger during a the driver, front passenger, and
chests of the driver and a front seat moderate to severe side impact (see passengers in the outer rear seating
passenger during a moderate to page 26 for more information on how positions during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page your side airbags work). severe side impact (see page 28 for
23 for more information on how more information on how your side
your front airbags work). curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
０５／０７／２７１５：２８：１５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１３
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
０５／０７／２７１５：２８：３０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１４
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide chance of someone being thrown out
instructions on how to properly of the vehicle during a crash, and it
protect the driver, adult passengers, helps prevent passengers from

and teenage children who are large accidentally opening a door and
enough and mature enough to drive falling out.
or ride in the front.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
See pages 32 − 39 for important an outsider from unexpectedly
guidelines on how to properly opening a door when you come to a
protect infants, small children, and stop.
larger children who ride in your
vehicle. See page 77 for how to lock the
doors, and page 61 for how the door
1.Close and Lock the Doors and trunk open monitor works. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed maintain full control of the vehicle.
and locked. Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Your vehicle has a door and
trunk open monitor on the
instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the trunk is
not tightly closed.
CONTINUED
11
０５／０７／２７１５：２８：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１５
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure
steering wheel in and out (see page the seat is locked in position.
73 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
See page 82 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
０５／０７／２７１５：２８：５０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１６
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their

death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page 87 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
See pages 82 and 84 for how to should adjust their restraint as high
adjust the seat-backs. as possible.
13
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：０１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１７
5.Fasten and Position the Seat take the force of a crash and reduces Never place the shoulder portion of a
Belts the chance of internal injuries. lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, behind your back. This could cause
then tug on the belt to make sure the If necessary, pull up on the belt again very serious injuries in a crash.
belt is securely latched. Check that to remove any slack, then check that
the belt is not twisted, because a the belt rests across the center of If a seat belt does not seem to work
twisted belt can cause serious your chest and over your shoulder. properly, it may not protect the
injuries in a crash. occupant in a crash.
This spreads the force of a crash
over the strongest bones in your No one should sit in a seat with an
upper body. inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
Improperly positioning the seat soon as possible.
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash. See page 17 for additional
information about your seat belts
Make sure all seat belts are and how to take care of them.
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
14
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：１０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１８
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women
Position position in the front seat can be
After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash
their seats and put on seat belts, it is by striking interior parts of the

very important that they continue to vehicle or being struck by an
sit upright, well back in their seats, inflating front airbag.
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly or out of
Sitting improperly can increase the position can result in serious
chance of injury during a crash. For injury or death in a crash.
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits Always sit upright, well back in
forward, leans forward or sideways, the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to
or puts one or both feet up, the floor. protect yourself and your unborn
chance of injury during a crash is child when driving or riding in a
greatly increased. vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
CONTINUED
15
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００１９
When driving, remember to sit Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away
upright and adjust the seat as far Two people should never use the from the airbag covers. If your
back as possible while allowing full same seat belt. If they do, they hands or arms are close to an
control of the vehicle. When riding could be very seriously injured in a airbag cover, they could be injured
as a front passenger, adjust the seat crash. if the airbag inflates.
as far back as possible.
Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on
This will reduce the risk of injuries belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
to both you and your unborn child occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
that can be caused by a crash or an shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
inflating front airbag. reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the seat belt and increase the propelled inside the vehicle and
Each time you have a checkup, ask chance of serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive. Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or
between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
16
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：３２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２０
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten The seat belts use the same
Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will monitoring system as the front
shoulder belts in all five seating come on about 6 seconds after the airbags. The system may not work
positions. The front seat belts are ignition switch is turned to the ON properly under these conditions:

also equipped with automatic seat (II) position.
belt tensioners. Placing heavy items on the front
If either the driver or a front passenger’s seat.
The seat belt system passenger does not fasten their seat
includes an indicator on the belt while driving, the beeper will The front passenger is not sitting
instrument panel and a beeper to sound and the indicator will flash properly.
remind you and your passengers to again at regular intervals.
fasten your seat belts. The front passenger’s seat-back is
When no one is sitting in the front pressed forward by a folded-down
This system monitors the front seat passenger’s seat, or a small child is rear seat.
belts. riding there, the indicator will not
If you turn the ignition switch to the come on and the beeper will not Have your vehicle checked by a
ON (II) position before your seat sound. dealer if the indicator comes on or
belt is fastened, the beeper will the beeper sounds when there is no
sound and the indicator will flash. If front passenger or objects on the
your seat belt is not fastened before front seat.
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
17
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２１
Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency If the shoulder part of the belt is
The lap/shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving, pulled all the way out, the locking
your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in mechanism will activate. The belt
and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some will retract, but it will not allow the
tension on the belt. During a collision passenger to move freely.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help To deactivate the locking
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body. mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
latched (see page 14 for how to let the seat belt fully retract. To
properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
the driver’s have an additional as far as needed.
To unlock the belt, press the red locking mechanism that must be
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide activated to secure a child seat (see
the belt across your body so that it page 43 )
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
18
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：５０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２２
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance
activate primarily in frontal collisions, For safety, you should check the
and they should activate in any condition of your seat belts regularly.
collision severe enough to cause

front airbag inflation. Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
The tensioners can also be activated that the latches work smoothly and
during a collision in which the front the belts retract easily. Any belt that
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the is not in good condition or working
airbags would not be needed, but the properly may not provide adequate
additional restraint could be helpful. protection and should be replaced as
soon as possible.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until Honda provides a lifetime warranty
For added protection, the front seat they are unbuckled in the normal on seat belts for U.S. models. See
belts are equipped with automatic manner. your Honda Warranty Information
seat belt tensioners. When activated, booklet for details.
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
19
０５／０７／２７１５：２９：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２３
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious
of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
The dealer should also inspect the needed.
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
For information on how to clean your

seat belts, see page. 251
20
０５／０７／２７１５：３０：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２４
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes:
(12) Two SRS (supplemental restraint

(8) (9) (2) (11) system) front airbags. The driver’s

(5) airbag is stored in the center of
(14) the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
(1) passenger. The airbags are stored
(3) in the outer edges of the seat-
(6) backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
(1) Driver’s Airbag (13) AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit (4)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners Two side curtain airbags, one for
(5) Side Airbags (10) (7) each side of the vehicle. The
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor (5) (10) airbags are stored in the ceiling,
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors (4) above the side windows. The front
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (13) (14) (7) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit 28 ).
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags CONTINUED
21
０５／０７／２７１５：３０：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２５
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 19 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you that the
seat. These automatically turn off passenger’s side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect a the passenger’s front airbag if turned off (see page 29 ).
moderate to severe front impact or they detect an infant or a small
side impact. child may be in the seat (see page An indicator on the dashboard that
25 ). alerts you that the passenger’s
Sensors that can detect whether a front airbag has been turned off
child is in the passenger’s side A sophisticated electronic system (see page 29 ).
airbag path and automatically turn that continually monitors and
the airbag off (see page 29 ). records information about the Emergency backup power in case
sensors, the control unit, the your vehicle’s electrical system is
A driver’s seat position sensor that airbag activators, the seat belt disconnected in a crash.
monitors the distance of the seat tensioners, and driver and front
from the front airbag. If the seat is passenger seat belt use when the
too far forward, the airbag will ignition switch is in the ON (II)
inflate with less force (see page position.
25 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 28 ).
22
０５／０７／２７１５：３０：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２６
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 25 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
23
０５／０７／２７１５：３０：３８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２７
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of belt.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do In a more severe crash, both stages
so. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage protection.
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
24
０５／０７／２７１５：３０：５１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２８
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work DRIVER’S

SEAT PASSENGER’S
properly: POSITION SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in the front, if
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. the sensors detect the weight of an
put their feet under the front seats. infant or small child, the system will
If there is a problem with the sensor, automatically turn the passenger’s
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
25
０５／０７／２７１５：３１：０３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００２９
When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
29 ). Moving the front seat forcibly
back on the folded rear seat.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the Folding the rear seat-back onto a
airbag will be off. However, the reclined front passenger’s seat-
passenger airbag off indicator will back.
not come on.
Hanging heavy items on the front
To ensure that the passenger’s passenger seat, or placing heavy
advanced front airbag system will items in the seat-back pocket.
work properly, do not do anything If you ever have a moderate to
that would increase or decrease the Also, make sure the floor mat severe side impact, sensors will
weight on the front passenger’s seat. behind the front passenger’s seat detect rapid deceleration and signal
This includes: is hooked to the floor mat anchor the control unit to instantly inflate
(see page 251 ). If it is not, the mat either the driver’s or the passenger’s
A rear passenger pushing or may interfere with the proper side airbag.
pulling on the back of the front operation of the sensors and
passenger’s seat. operation of the seat.
26
０５／０７／２７１５：３１：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３０
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the To reduce the risk of injury from an on (see page 29 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s inflating side airbag, your vehicle has passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there an automatic cutoff system for the passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. passenger’s side airbag. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, this system
should wear their seat belts and sit is designed to shut off the side There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. airbag if a child leans into the side the moment the passenger moves
airbag’s path. into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
The side airbag may also shut off if a on or goes off.
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans A front seat passenger should not
sideways into the airbag’s use a cushion or other object as a
deployment path. backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
27
０５／０７／２７１５：３１：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３１
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants When you turn the ignition switch to
should wear their seat belts and sit the ON (II) position, this indicator
upright and well back in their seats. comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
In a moderate to severe side impact, by your dealer. For example:
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to If the SRS indicator does not come
instantly inflate the side curtain on after you turn the ignition
airbag on the driver’s or the switch to the ON (II) position.
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
28
０５／０７／２７１５：３１：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３２
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Indicator Works Indicator Works
may not work when you need them. U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada

This indicator alerts you that the
Ignoring the SRS indicator can passenger’s side airbag has been
result in serious injury or death automatically shut off. It does not
if the airbag systems or mean there is a problem with your
tensioners do not work properly. side airbags.
Have your vehicle checked by a When you turn the ignition switch to
dealer as soon as possible if the ON (II) position, the indicator
the SRS indicator alerts you to should come on for several seconds PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
a possible problem. and then go off (see page 58 ). If it
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes This indicator alerts you that the
on while driving without a passenger passenger’s front airbag has been
in the front seat, have the system shut off because weight sensors
checked. detect the weight of an infant or
small child on the front passenger’s
seat. It does not mean there is a
problem with the airbag.
29
０５／０７／２７１５：３１：４８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３３
If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as
come on. parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this
However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
If the indicator comes on with no vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
problem with the advanced airbag that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
system. Have the vehicle checked by replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
your dealer as soon as possible. unit and other related parts. If a should inspect the driver’s seat
front airbag inflates, the seat belt position sensor, the front
The passenger airbag off indicator tensioners must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors, the
may also come on and off repeatedly front seat belt tensioners, and all
if total weight on the seat is near the Do not try to remove or replace seat belts worn during the crash to
airbag cutoff threshold. any airbag by yourself. This must make sure they are operating
be done by your dealer or a properly.
If this happens, have the passenger knowledgeable body shop.
ride properly restrained in the back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
30
０５／０７／２７１５：３１：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３４
Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat- Do not recline the front passenger’s
Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting seat-back as far to the rear as
airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing possible with the right rear seat
seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers folded down. This will cause the

protection. can prevent your side airbags from front passenger’s weight sensors
inflating during a side impact. to work improperly. The system
Do not tamper with airbag may shut off the front passenger’s
components or wiring for any Do not expose the front seat-backs airbag and the passenger airbag
reason. Tampering could cause to liquid. If water or another liquid off indicator will come on. The
the airbags to deploy, possibly soaks into a seat-back, it can seat belt reminder indicator for a
causing very serious injury. prevent the side airbag cutoff front seat passenger may also
system from working properly. work improperly.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your Make sure that the folded-down
dealer. This could make the rear seat does not press the front
driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat-back. Check the
front passenger’s weight sensors passenger airbag off indicator to
ineffective. If it is necessary to confirm that the passenger’s
remove or modify a front seat to advanced front airbag is operating
accommodate a person with properly.
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
31
０５／０７／２７１５：３２：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３５
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 46 − 49 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 37 − 45 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
32
０５／０７／２７１５：３２：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３６
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
all children age 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
Some states have laws restricting advanced front airbag system that
where children may ride. automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
front airbag off (see page 29 ), Children who have outgrown child
Children who ride in back are less please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
likely to be injured by striking or killed by an inflating passenger’s
interior vehicle parts during a Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
collision or hard braking. Also, Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
children cannot be injured by an the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
inflating front airbag when they ride with a passenger’s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
in the back. the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt (see page 46 for important
of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
to kill or very seriously injure an children).
infant.
33
０５／０７／２７１５：３２：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３７
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISOR DASHBOARD
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
34
０５／０７／２７１５：３２：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３８
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put contact, we strongly recommend
children can be properly restrained. an infant or small child in the front that another adult ride with the

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the child in the back seat. The back
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires seat is far safer for a child than the
front: attention. front.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 46 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 82 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
35
０５／０７／２７１５：３２：５４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００３９
Additional Safety Precautions Do not leave children alone in a Keep vehicle keys and remote
Never hold an infant or child on vehicle. Leaving children without transmitters out of the reach of
your lap. If you are not wearing a adult supervision is illegal in most children. Even very young
seat belt in a crash, you could be states and Canadian provinces, children learn how to unlock
thrown forward and crush the and can be very hazardous. vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
child against the dashboard or a switch, and open the trunk, which
seat-back. If you are wearing a For example, infants and small can lead to accidental injury or
seat belt, the child can be torn children left in a vehicle on a hot death.
from your arms and be seriously day can die from heatstroke. A
hurt or killed. child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
Never put a seat belt over yourself the vehicle in motion, possibly
and a child. During a crash, the injuring themselves or others.
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries. Lock both doors and the trunk
when your vehicle is not in use.
Never let two children use the Children who play in vehicles can
same seat belt. If they do, they accidentally get trapped inside.
could be very seriously injured in a Teach your children not to play in
crash. or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 81 ).
36
０５／０７／２７１５：３３：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４０
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least It could also interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
37
０５／０７／２７１５：３３：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４１
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any situation, we strongly Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
recommend that you install the child child use the child seat as long as
seat directly behind the front possible, until the child reaches the
passenger’s seat, move the seat as weight or height limit for the seat.
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Placing a forward-facing child seat in

in the front seat can result in the front seat of a vehicle equipped
serious injury or death during a with a passenger’s airbag can be
collision. hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type far forward, or the child’s head is
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old, thrown forward during a collision, an
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat inflating airbag can strike the child
front. maker’s weight and height limits, with enough force to cause very
should be restrained in a forward- serious or fatal injuries.
facing, upright child seat.
Even with advanced front airbags,
Of the different seats available, we which can automatically turn the
recommend those that have a five- passenger’s front airbag off (see
point harness system as shown. page 25 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
38
０５／０７／２７１５：３３：３０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４２
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle and the the lower anchors and tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two outer Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. seating positions in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 41 ).
CONTINUED
39
０５／０７／２７１５：３３：４２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４３
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position or positions secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (lower anchors and Make sure the child is properly
tethers for children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
40
０５／０７／２７１５：３３：５３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４４
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
41
０５／０７／２７１５：３４：０３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４５
TETHER STRAP HOOK 7. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Flexible type ANCHOR
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page

have a flexible-type connector as 87 ), then route the tether strap
shown above. through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
42
０５／０７／２７１５：３４：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４６
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
43
０５／０７／２７１５：３４：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４７
To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
44
０５／０７／２７１５：３４：３５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４８
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor
Tether
ANCHOR TETHER STRAP HOOK

COVER
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK ANCHOR
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
1. After properly securing the child 1. After properly securing the child
A child seat with a tether can be seat (see page 43 ), lift the head seat (see page 43 ), route the
installed in any seating position in restraint, then route the tether tether strap over the seat-back.
the back seat, using the anchorage strap over the seat-back and
points shown above. through the head restraint legs. 2. Follow steps 2 and 3 from the
2. Lift the cover, then attach the previous column.
Since a tether can provide additional tether strap hook to the anchor,
security to the lap/shoulder belt making sure the strap is not
installation, we recommend using a twisted.
tether whenever one is required or 3. Tighten the strap according to the
available. seat maker’s instructions.
45
０５／０７／２７１５：３４：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００４９
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
46
０５／０７／２７１５：３４：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５０
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat to drive.

between the child’s neck and arm?
Booster seats can be high-back or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as low-back. Whichever style you select,

possible, touching the child’s make sure the booster seat meets
thighs? federal safety standards (see page
39 ) and that you follow the booster
5. Will the child be able to stay seat maker’s instructions.
seated like this for the whole trip?
If a child who uses a booster seat
If you answer yes to all these must ride in front, move the vehicle
questions, the child is ready to wear seat as far back as possible and be
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If sure the child is wearing the seat
you answer no to any question, the belt properly.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a A child may continue using a booster
back seat and use a booster seat seat until the tops of their ears are
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them even with the top of the vehicle’s or
properly without the booster. booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
Some states and Canadian provinces the lap/shoulder belt without a
also require children to use a booster booster seat.
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
47
０５／０７／２７１５：３５：１０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５１
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 46 ). If most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. near the floor.
of position.
Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must properly positioned and secured.
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
48
０５／０７／２７１５：３５：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５２
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
49
０５／０７／２７１５：３５：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５３
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. You should exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and
vehicle properly. you. set the heating and cooling system/
climate control system as shown
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or below.
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked vehicle
The vehicle is raised for an oil with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
High levels of carbon monoxide can and cooling system/climate control
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, system as follows:
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed. 1. Select the fresh air mode.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 2. Select the mode.
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
underside. vehicle out of the garage. 4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
50
０５／０７／２７１５：３５：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５４
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
U.S. models
RADIATOR CAP
Canadian models 4-cylinder LX models Except 4-cylinder LX models
CONTINUED
51
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：０２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５５
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

U.S. models
U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
52
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５６
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 54 Power Door Locks ........................... 77
the controls and displays that Instument Panel ............................... 55 Remote Transmitter ........................ 78
contribute to the daily operation of Instument Panel Indicators ............ 57 Trunk................................................. 81
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 63 Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 81
controls are within easy reach. Odometer ...................................... 63 Seats .................................................. 82
Trip Meter .................................... 64 Manual Seat Adjustments........... 82

Fuel Gauge ................................... 64 Power Seat Adjustments ............. 84
Temperature Gauge .................... 64 Head Restraints ........................... 87
Outside Temperature Folding Rear Seat ........................ 88
Indicator .................................... 65 Seat Heaters ..................................... 90
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 65 Power Windows ............................... 91
Maintenance Minder ....................... 66 Moonroof .......................................... 94
Controls Near the Steering Mirrors .............................................. 95
Wheel ............................................ 67 Parking Brake .................................. 96
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 68 Interior Convenience Items ............ 97
Turn Signal and Headlights............ 69 Glove Box ..................................... 98
Automatic Lighting Off Beverage Holders ........................ 98
Feature ...................................... 70 Console Compartment ................ 99
Daytime Running Lights............. 70 Center CD Pocket........................ 99
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 71 Coin Pocket ................................ 100
Hazard Warning Button .................. 71 Accessory Power Sockets......... 100
Rear Window Defogger .................. 72 Sun Visor .................................... 101
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 73 Vanity Mirror ............................. 101
Keys and Locks ................................ 74 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 102
Immobilizer System......................... 75 Coat Hook ................................... 102
Ignition Switch ................................. 76 Interior Lights ................................ 102
53
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５７
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.55, 56)

GAUGES (P.63)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.71)
(P.95)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.124)
CLOCK
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.173)
MASTER SWITCH
(P.77)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
SWITCHES (P.108)
(P.91) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
FUEL FILL (P.113, 117)
DOOR(P.185)/
TRUNK
RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.81)
HOOD RELEASE SEAT HEATER ACCESSORY

HANDLE SWITCH POWER SOCKETS
(P.186) (P.90) (P.100)
54
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５８
Instrument Panel
U.S. models
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.57) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.62)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR＊ (P.62)
(P.59) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.60) SYSTEM INDICATOR＊ (P.62)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.62)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION (ABS) INDICATOR (P.59)
INDICATOR LAMP MAINTENANCE MINDER
(P.57) INDICATOR (P.61)
CHARGING DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN
SYSTEM MONITOR (P.61)
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.58)
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD SECURITY SYSTEM
WARNING INDICATORS (P.59) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.60)
INDICATOR (P.61)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.60) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.58)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
EX-V6 with A/T model is shown. SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.58) INDICATOR (P.60)
＊ : If equipped.
55
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：３３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００５９
Instrument Panel
Canadian models
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.57) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.62)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR＊ (P.62)
(P. 59) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (p.60) SYSTEM INDICATOR＊ (P.62)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.62)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION (ABS) INDICATOR (P.59)
INDICATOR LAMP MAINTENANCE MINDER
( P.57) INDICATOR (P.61)
CHARGING DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN
SYSTEM MONITOR (P.61)
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.58)
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR (P.60)
WARNING INDICATORS (P.59) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.60)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.61)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.60) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.58)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P.60)
EX-V6 with A/T model is shown. SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.58)
＊ : If equipped.
56
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６０
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder Malfunction Indicator
indicators to give you important Indicator Lamp
information about your vehicle. This indicator reminds you and your See page 277 .
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Low Oil Pressure
If you turn the ignition switch to the Indicator

ON (II) position before fastening The engine can be severely damaged
your seat belts, the beeper sounds, if this indicator flashes or stays on
and the indicator flashes. If you do when the engine is running. For
not fasten your seat belts before the more information, see page 276 .
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on. Charging System
Indicator
If your front passenger does not If this indicator comes on when the
fasten their seat belt, the indicator engine is running, the battery is not
comes on about 6 seconds after the being charged. For more information,
ignition switch is turned to the ON see page 276 .
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your

seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 17 .
57
０５／０７／２７１５：３６：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６１
U.S. Canada Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada

System Indicator
This indicator comes on for several
Parking Brake and Brake System seconds when you turn the ignition Side Airbag Off Indicator
Indicator switch to the ON (II) position. If it This indicator comes on when you
This indicator has two functions: comes on at any other time, it turn the ignition switch to the ON
indicates a potential problem with (II) position. If it comes on at any
1. It comes on when you turn the your front airbags. This indicator will other time, it indicates that the
ignition switch to the ON (II) also alert you to a potential problem passenger’s side airbag has
position. It is a reminder to check with your side airbags, passenger’s automatically shut off. For more
the parking brake. A beeper side airbag automatic cutoff system, information, see page 29 .
sounds if you try to drive with the side curtain airbags, automatic seat
parking brake not fully released. belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
Driving with the parking brake not sensor, or the front passenger’s
fully released can damage the weight sensors. For more
brakes and tires. information, see page 28 .
2. If it stays on after you have fully

released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 278 .
58
０５／０７／２８１７：０３：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６２
Anti-lock Brake System Immobilizer System Turn Signal and

(ABS) Indicator Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on for a few Indicators
a few seconds when you turn the seconds when you turn the ignition The left or right turn signal indicator
ignition switch to the ON (II) switch to the ON (II) position. It will blinks when you signal a lane change
position. If it comes on at any other then go off if you have inserted a or turn. If the indicator does not

time, there is a problem with the properly-coded ignition key. If it is blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
ABS. If this happens, have your not a properly-coded key, the means one of the turn signal bulbs is
vehicle checked at a dealer. With indicator will blink, and the engine burned out (see page249 ). Replace
this indicator on, your vehicle still will not start (see page 75 ). the bulb as soon as possible, since
has normal braking ability but no other drivers cannot see that you are
anti-lock function. For more This indicator also blinks several signaling.
information, see page 209 . times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to When you press the hazard warning
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK button, both turn signal indicators
(0) position. blink. All turn signals on the outside
of the vehicle should flash.
59
０５／０７／２７１５：３７：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６３
‘‘Daytime Running Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Lights’’ Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the This indicator reminds you that the
ignition switch is turned to the ON exterior lights are on. It comes on
(II) position and the parking brake is when the light switch is in either the
released, it means there is a problem or position. If you turn the
in the high beam headlight’s circuit. ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
Have your vehicle checked by your (I) or LOCK (0) position without
dealer. turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
High Beam Indicator chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on with the LOW FUEL INDICATOR
high beam headlights. For more Washer Level Indicator
information, see page 69 . This indicator is located in the fuel
Canadian models only gauge. It comes on as a reminder
When the daytime running lights This indicator comes on when the that you must refuel soon.
(DRL) are on, this indicator comes washer fluid level is low. Add washer
on with reduced brightness (see fluid when you see this indicator When the indicator comes on, there
page 70 ). (see page 238). are about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3 ) of
fuel remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
60
０５／０７／２７１５：３７：３３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６４
Maintenance Minder Door and Trunk Open Monitor Security System Indicator
Indicator
If the remaining engine oil life is SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
more than 16 percent, this indicator
comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to the

ON (II) position.
This indicator reminds you that it is The specific door indicator comes on
time to take your vehicle in for in this monitor if either door is not
scheduled maintenance. The fully closed.
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the The trunk indicator comes on when
information display. See page 221 for the trunk is opened or if it is not fully
more information on the closed. This indicator comes on when the
maintenance minder. security system is set. For more
All the indicators in the monitor information, see page 174 .
This indicator goes off when your come on for a few seconds when you
dealer resets it after completing the turn the ignition switch to the ON
required maintenance service. (II) position.
61
０５／０７／２７１５：３７：４９３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６５
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Cruise Main Indicator

(VSA) System Indicator
On all V6 models On all V6 models This indicator comes on when you
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions: turn on the cruise control system by
a few seconds when you turn the pressing the CRUISE button (see
ignition switch to the ON (II) 1. It comes on as a reminder that you page 175 ).
position. have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system. Cruise Control Indicator
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or if it does not come on 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see This indicator comes on when you
when you turn the ignition switch to page 211 ). set the cruise control. See page
the ON (II) position, there is a 175 for information on operating the
problem with the VSA system. Take 3. It comes on along with the VSA cruise control.
your vehicle to a dealer to have it system indicator if there is a
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle problem with the VSA system.
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and This indicator normally comes on for
stability enhancement. See page a few seconds when you turn the
211 for more information on the ignition switch to the ON (II)
VSA system. position. For more information, see
page 211 .
62
０５／０７／２７１５：３７：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６６
Gauges
To switch the information display

between the odometer/trip meter,
outside temperature/trip meter (if
equipped), and engine oil life and TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
maintenance item code(s), press the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly.

TEMPERATURE
When you turn the ignition switch to GAUGE
the ON (II) position, your last
selection appears in the display.
Odometer
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the INFORMATION DISPLAY
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated. ODOMETER/TRIP METER/OUTSIDE SELECT/RESET
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR/CHECK FUEL CAP KNOB
INDICATOR/MAINTENANCE MINDER
U.S. A/T model is shown.
63
０５／０７／２７１５：３８：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６７
Gauges
Trip Meter Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge

This meter shows the number of This shows how much fuel you have. This shows the temperature of the
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) It may show slightly more or less engine’s coolant. During normal
driven since you last reset it. than the actual amount. The needle operation, the pointer should rise
returns to the bottom after you turn from the bottom white mark to about
There are two trip meters: Trip A off the ignition. the middle of the gauge. In severe
and Trip B. Switch between them by driving conditions, such as very hot
pressing the Select/Reset knob weather or a long period of uphill
repeatedly. Each trip meter works driving, the pointer may rise into the
independently, so you can keep track Avoid driving with an extremely low upper half of the gauge. If it reaches
of two different distances. f uel level. Running out of f uel could the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging side of the road. See page 274 for
To reset a trip meter, display it and the catalytic converter. instructions and precautions on
then press and hold the select/reset checking the engine’s cooling
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’. system.
64
０５／０７／２７１５：３８：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６８
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is Check Fuel Cap Indicator
On 4-cylinder EX-L and 6-cylinder EX incorrectly displayed, you can adjust If you fuel cap is loose or missing, a
models it ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
This indicator displays the outside Canadian models) warmer or cooler. appears in the information display
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. after you start the engine. Turn the
models) or Centigrade (Canadian NOTE: The temperature must be engine off and confirm the fuel cap is

models). To see the outside stabilized before doing this installed. If it is, loosen the cap, then
temperature, press and release the procedure. retighten it until it clicks at least
Select/Reset knob until the once. When you restart the engine,
temperature is displayed. Select the outside temperature the message appears again. To clear
indicator, then press the Select/ the message, press and release the
The temperature sensor is in the Reset knob for 10 seconds. The Select/Reset knob.
front bumper. Therefore, the following sequence will appear for 1
temperature reading can be affected second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4,
by heat reflection from the road −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
surface, engine heat, and the −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect When the temperature reaches the
temperature reading when your desired value, release the Select/
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
The sensor delays the indicator
update until it reaches the correct In certain weather conditions,
outside temperature. This may take temperature readings near freezing
several minutes. (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface. CONTINUED
65
０５／０７／２７１５：３８：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００６９
Gauges
If the system still detects a loose or Maintenance Minder

missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction The information display shows you
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. the engine oil life and maintenance
Turn the engine off, and check or service items when the ignition
retighten the fuel fill cap until it switch is in the ON (II) position. This
clicks at least once. The MIL goes information helps to keep you aware
out after 3 days of normal driving of the periodic maintenance your
once the cap is tightened or replaced. vehicle needs for continued trouble-
If it does not go out, have your free driving. Refer to page221 for
dealer inspect the vehicle. For more more information.
information, see page 277 .
66
０５／０７／２７１５：３８：３３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７０
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/ HORN＊1 INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER

TURN SIGNALS BRIGHTNESS (P.71) WIPERS/WASHERS AIRBAG OFF
(P.69) (P.68) INDICATOR
(P.29)

HAZARD WARNING
REMOTE AUDIO BUTTON
CONTROLS (P.71)
(P.171)
AUDIO SYSTEM
MOONROOF (P.124)
SWITCH＊2
(P.94)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.72)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
OFF SWITCH＊2
(P.212) SEAT HEATERS＊2
(P.90)
TILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT CRUISE CONTROLS
(P.73) (P.175)
EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.
＊1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊2 : If equipped.
67
０５／０７／２７１５：３８：４７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７１
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers MIST − The wipers run at high Windshield Washers − Pull the
speed until you release the lever. wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
OFF − The wipers are not activated. release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
INT − The length of the wiper sweep after you release the lever.
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT

TIME ring.
If you turn it to the shortest delay,

the wipers will change to low
1. MIST speed operation when the vehicle
2. OFF speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed While the vehicle is stopped and in
5. HI − High speed gear, the wipers sweep the
6 Windshield washers windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position. LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
68
０５／０７／２７１５：３８：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７２
Turn Signal and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the If you leave the lights on with the
lever to signal a left turn and up to key removed from the ignition
signal a right turn. To signal a lane switch, you will hear a reminder
change, push lightly on the lever, chime when you open the driver’s
and hold it. The lever will return to door.
center when you release it or

complete a turn. High Beams − Push the lever
forward until you hear a click to turn
Headlights On − Turning the on the high beams. The blue high
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns beam indicator will come on (see
on the parking lights, taillights, side- page 60 ). Pull the lever back to
marker lights, and rear license plate return to the low beams.
lights.
1. Turn signal To flash the high beams, pull the
2. Off Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ lever back lightly, then release it.
3. Parking and interior lights position turns on the headlights. The high beams will stay on as long
4. Headlights as you hold the lever back.
5. High beams When the light switch is in the
6. Flash high beams ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
69
０５／０７／２７１５：３９：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７３
Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature The lights will turn on again when Daytime Running Lights
This feature turns off the headlights, you unlock or open the driver’s door. With the headlight switch OFF or
parking lights, side marker lights, If you unlock the door, but do not position, the high beam
taillights, and license plate lights open it within 15 seconds, the lights headlights and the high beam
automatically under these will go off. With the driver’s door indicator come on with reduced
conditions: open, the lights on indicator comes brightness when you turn the
on along with a lights-on reminder ignition switch to the ON (II)
If you leave the headlight switch in chime. position and release the parking
the or position, remove brake. They remain on until you turn
the key, then open and close the the ignition switch off, even if you
driver’s door, the lights will turn set the parking brake.
off after 15 seconds.
The headlights revert to normal
If you remove the key from the operation when you turn them on
ignition switch with the headlight with the switch.
switch on, but do not open the
door and get out, the lights will
turn off after 10 minutes.
70
０５／０７／２７１５：３９：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７４
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness brightness when you turn the Hazard Warning Button
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If you do not insert the key in the

ignition switch after opening the

driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn

the ignition switch to the ON (II)
SELECT/RESET KNOB position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
The Select/Reset knob on the Push the button between the center
instrument panel controls the To reduce glare at night, the instru- vents to turn on the hazard warning
brightness of the instrument panel ment panel illumination dims when lights (four-way flashers). This
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the you turn the light switch to or causes all four outside turn signals
brightness. . Turning the Select/Reset and both turn indicators in the
knob fully to the right until you hear instrument panel to flash. Use the
The instrument panel will illuminate a click will cancel the reduced bright- hazard warning lights if you need to
with reduced brightness when you ness. park in a dangerous area near heavy
open the driver’s door. The traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignition switch, then go to normal
71
０５／０７／２７１５：３９：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７５
Rear Window Defogger
Manual A/C type shown Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation system
The rear window defogger will clear Make sure the rear window is clear The defogger and antenna wires on
fog, frost, and thin ice from the and you have good visibility before the inside of the rear window can be
window. Push the defogger button to starting to drive. accidentally damaged. When
turn it on and off. The indicator cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
above/in the button comes on to to-side.
show the defogger is on. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
72
０５／０７／２７１５：３９：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７６
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving. steering wheel in that position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,

position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or

down and in or out to the desired
position. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
the indicators.
73
０５／０７／２７１５：３９：４２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７７
Keys and Locks
You should have received a key These keys contain electronic

KEY MASTER VALET KEY number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
NUMBER KEY WITH (LIGHT GREY) need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
TAG REMOTE
TRANSMITTER have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the driver’s immediately with a soft cloth.
door lock. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
74
０５／０７／２７１５：３９：５２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７８
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine’s fuel fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. you insert the key. may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any

When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer recognize the coding of your key, interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on for contact your dealer. operation.
a few seconds, then go out. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the Do not attempt to alter this system Changes or modifications not expressly
system does not recognize the or add other devices to it. Electrical approved by the party responsible for
coding of the key. Turn the ignition problems could result that may make compliance could void the user’s
switch to the LOCK (0) position, your vehicle undrivable. authority to operate the equipment.
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II) If you have lost your key and cannot This device complies with Industry
position again. start your engine, contact your Canada Standard RSS-210.
dealer. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
75
０５／０７／２７１５：４０：０２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００７９
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the ignition
to turn the key. Firmly turn the switch in the LOCK (0) or the
steering wheel to the left or right as ACCESSORY (I) position and open
you turn the key. the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the If your vehicle has an automatic
accessory power sockets in this transmission, the shift lever must be
position. in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the Removing the key from the
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the ignition switch while driving
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) locks the steering. This can
LOCK (0) − You can insert or position. cause you to lose control.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If START (III) − Use this position Remove the key from the
your vehicle has an automatic only to start the engine. The switch ignition switch only when
transmission, the shift lever must returns to the ON (II) position when parked.
also be in park. you let go of the key.
76
０５／０７／２７１５：４０：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８０
Power Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To lock the passenger’s door when
LOCK TAB
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and
push the lock tab down or push the

top of the master switch, then close
the door.
Lockout Prevention
With the key in the ignition switch,
you cannot lock the both doors from
the outside by both master door lock
To lock the doors, push the top of The lock tab on the passenger’s door switches or the lock tab on the
the master door lock switch on locks and unlocks only that door. driver’s door.
either door, press the lock tab down Pulling up on the driver’s door lock
on the driver’s door, or use the key tab only unlocks the driver’s door.
on the outside lock on the driver’s
door. To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, turn the key and
Pushing the bottom of either master release it. If you turn it again, both
door lock switch unlocks both doors. doors unlock.
You can open or close the windows

by using the key in the driver’s door
(see page 93 ).
77
０５／０７／２７１５：４０：２３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８１
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK − Press this button once You can also open both power
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it windows from outside the vehicle
twice to unlock the passenger’s door. with the remote transmitter (see
LOCK Some exterior lights will flash twice page 92 ).
UNLOCK BUTTON each time you push the button.
BUTTON TRUNK RELEASE − Press this
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light button for about 1 second to open
switch is in the door activated the trunk.
position) will come on when you
TRUNK press the UNLOCK button. If you do
PANIC RELEASE PANIC − Press and hold this
BUTTON BUTTON not open either door within 30 button for about 2 seconds to attract
seconds, the lights fade out. If you attention: the horn will sound and
relock the doors with the remote the exterior lights will flash for about
When the key is in the ignition transmitter before 30 seconds have 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
switch, the functions of each button elapsed, the lights will go off press any other button on the remote
is disabled. immediately. transmitter, or turn the ignition
LOCK − Press this button once to switch to the ON (II) position.
lock both doors. Some exterior lights If you do not open either door within
will flash once. 30 seconds, the doors automatically
When you push the LOCK button relock and the security system sets.
twice within 5 seconds, the lights will
flash and the horn will beep to verify
that the doors are locked and that
the security system has set. The
LOCK button will not work this way
if either door is not fully closed.
78
０５／０７／２７１５：４０：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８２
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter

Avoid dropping or throwing the Battery
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from

extreme temperature.

BATTERY
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the

replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer. SCREW
TAB
If it takes several pushes on the 2. Separate the transmitter by prying

button to lock or unlock the doors, its middle seam with your
replace the battery as soon as fingernail.
possible.
Battery type: CR1616 3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
To replace the battery: by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver. CONTINUED
79
０５／０７／２７１５：４０：４３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８３
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the As required by the FCC:

back of the inner cover, and note This device complies with Part 15 of the
the polarity. Make sure the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
polarity of the new battery is the following two conditions: (1) This device
same (＋ side facing down), then may not cause harmful interference, and
insert it into the back of the cover. (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
5. Install the parts in reverse order. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
80
０５／０７／２７１５：４０：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８４
Trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times Emergency Trunk Opener
Pull while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 50 .

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
You can open the trunk in two ways:

As a safety feature, your vehicle has
Pull the trunk release handle to MASTER a release lever on the trunk latch so
the left of the driver’s seat. KEY the trunk can be opened from the
inside. To open the trunk, push the
Press and hold the trunk release To protect items in the trunk when release lever to the left.
button on the remote transmitter. you need to give the key to someone
else: Parents should decide if their
To close the trunk, press down on 1. Lock the trunk release handle children should be shown how to use
the trunk lid. with the master key. this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 36 .
2. Give the person the valet key.
81
０５／０７／２７１５：４１：１０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８５
Seats
All V6 models and the 4-cylinder Manual Seat Adjustments

EX-L models have a power See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
adjustable driver’s seat. information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
The 4-cylinder EX model has a backs.
power seat bottom height Make all seat adjustments before
adjustment. All other driver’s seat you start driving.
adjustments in this model are
manual.
The 4-cylinder LX model has manual

driver’s seat adjustments (see next
column).
To change the seat-back angle of the
The front passenger’s seat in all front seat, pull up on the lever on the
models adjusts manually. outside of the seat bottom.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
82
０５／０７／２７１５：４１：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８６
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height Make sure to pull the lever upward Driver’s Seat Power Height
Adjustment or downward to its full range. Adjustment
Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.

On 4-cylinder LX model On 4-cylinder EX model
The height of your driver’s seat is The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat, power adjustable. Pull up on the
repeatedly pull up the lever on the switch to raise the seat. Push it down
outside of the seat cushion. To lower to lower the seat.
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly. Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
83
０５／０７／２７１５：４１：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８７
Seats
Power Seat Adjustments Raises or lowers the

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder seat.
EX-L model
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat- Adjusts the seat-
backs. back angle forward
or backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
Moves the seat
Moving the long horizontal switch forward and
adjusts the seat bottom in several backward.
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the Moves the front of
seat-back angle. the seat up or down
and the rear of the
seat up or down.
84
０５／０７／２７１５：４１：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８８
Seats
Driver’s Lumbar Support Armrest Rear Seat Access

Driver’s Side

RELEASE LEVER
On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models To use the console lid as an armrest,
To change the lumbar support, move slide it to the desired position. On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder
the lever on the right side of the EX-L model
seat-back forward or backward. Make sure your passenger’s hands To get into the rear seat on the
Keep moving the lever forward or or fingers are away from the armrest driver’s side, open the door and pull
backward until you find a suitable before moving it. the release lever up on the side of
position. the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
CONTINUED
85
０５／０７／２７１５：４１：５３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００８９
Seats
After a passenger gets into the rear

Passenger’s Side seat, push the seat-back to the
To avoid damaging the seat-back angle upright position and push the whole
adjustment motor, do not operate the seat backwards until it latches. Make
seat-back angle switch when the seat- sure the seat is fully latched before
back is tilted f orward. sitting in it.
RELEASE LEVER
To get into the rear seat on the

passenger’s side, push downward on
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER the release lever at the base of the
seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
On LX and EX models forward and the entire seat will move
To get into the rear seat on the forward to allow easier entry to the
driver’s side, open the door and pull rear seat.
up on the seat-back adjustment lever.
The seat-back will tilt forward to
allow easier entry to the rear seat.
86
０５／０７／２７１５：４２：０３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９０
Seats
Head Restraints FRONT REAR

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints on the front seats and on
the outer rear seats.
The head restraints help protect you

and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. RELEASE BUTTON RELEASE BUTTON
They are most effective when you The head restraints adjust for height.
adjust them so the back of the You need both hands to adjust the
occupant’s head rests against the restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
center of the restraint. while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
87
０５／０７／２７１５：４２：１２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９１
Seats
Folding Rear Seat

The back of the rear seat folds down,
giving you direct access to the trunk.
The left and right seat-backs of the

rear seat can be folded separately
from inside the vehicle or inside the
trunk. GUIDE
CENTER
SHOULDER BELT
MASTER KEY
To fold down the seat-back from When storing cargo, you can move
inside the vehicle, insert the master the rear center shoulder belt out of
key in the lock on the rear shelf. To the way by removing the belt from
fold down the driver’s side, turn the the guide.
key clockwise, pull down the top of
the seat-back, then release the key.
To fold down the passenger’s side,
turn the key counterclockwise and
perform the same procedure.
88
０５／０７／２７１５：４２：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９２
Seats
Make sure that the folded seat-back Make sure all items in the trunk, or
does not interfere with the front items extending through the opening
passenger’s seat-back. This will into the back seat, are secured.
cause the front passenger’s weight Loose items can fly forward and
sensors to work improperly (see cause injury if you have to brake
page 25 ). Also check the passenger hard. See Carrying Cargo on page

airbag off indicator to assure proper 193 .
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag. Never drive with the seat-back
Pull folded down and the trunk lid open.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
positioned in front of the rear seat- page 50 .
back, and the center shoulder belt is
To release the seat-back from inside re-positioned in the guide whenever
the trunk, pull the release under the the seat-back is in its upright position.
trunk panel. Push the seat-back Be sure the center shoulder belt is
down, then let go of the release. not twisted.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it Do not put any heavy items on the
firmly against the trunk panel. Make seat-back when it is folded.
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
89
０５／０７／２７１５：４２：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９３
Seat Heaters
In HI, the heater turns off when the Follow these precautions whenever
seat gets warm, and turns back on you use the seat heaters:
after the seat temperature drops.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
In LO, the heater runs continuously. seats quickly, because it draws
It does not cycle with temperature large amounts of current from the
changes. battery.
If the engine is left idling for an

SEAT extended period, do not use the
HEATER seat heaters, even on the LO
SWITCH setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Both front seats have seat heaters.
The passenger seat is only heated in
the seat bottom because of the side
airbag cutoff system. The ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position to use seat heaters. Push the
top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat
up the seat. After the seat reaches a
comfortable temperature, select LO
by pushing the bottom of the switch.
This will keep the seat warm.
90
０５／０７／２７１５：４２：３７３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９４
Power Windows
AUTO − To open or close the

DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH driver’s window, push or pull the
Closing a power window on window switch firmly down or up to
someone’s hands or fingers can the second detent, and release it.
cause serious injury. The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the

Make sure your passengers are window, pull or push the window
away from the windows before switch briefly.
closing them.
MAIN SWITCH If the MAIN switch is off, the

passenger’s windows cannot be
Turn the ignition switch to the ON raised or lowered. Keep the MAIN
(II) position to raise or lower either switch off when you have children in
window. To open the window, push the vehicle so they do not injure
the switch down and hold it. Release themselves by operating the
the switch when you want the windows unintentionally.
window to stop. Pull back on the
switch and hold it to close the
window.
The windows operate for up to 10

minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either door
cancels this function. CONTINUED
91
０５／０７／２７１５：４２：４８３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９５
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is Opening the Windows with the
window runs into any obstacle while disconnected or goes dead, or the Remote Transmitter
it is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the You can open both windows from the
reverse direction, and then stop. To AUTO function will be disabled. The outside with the remote transmitter.
close the window, remove the power window system needs to be
obstacle, then use the window switch reset after reconnecting the battery 1. Press the UNLOCK button once
again. or installing the fuse. to unlock the driver’s door.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the 1. Start the engine. Push down and 2. Press the UNLOCK button a
window is almost closed. You should hold the driver’s window switch second time, and hold it. The
always check that all passengers and until the window is fully open. passenger’s door unlocks, and
objects are away from the window both windows start to open. To
before closing it. 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window stop the windows, release the
switch to close the window button.
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds. 3. To open the windows further,
press the button again (within 10
If the power windows do not operate seconds).
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer. You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
92
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：０１３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９６
Power Windows
UNLOCK BUTTON To open: To close:

1. Insert the key in the driver’s door 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock. lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then 2. Turn the key counterclockwise,

release it. then release it.

Open
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and 3. Turn the key counterclockwise
hold it. Both windows start to open. again, and hold it. Both windows
Close To stop the windows, release the start to close. To stop the windows,
key. release the key.
4. To open the windows further, turn 4. To close the windows further, turn
Opening/Closing the Windows and hold the key again (within and hold the key again (within
with the Key 10 seconds). 10 seconds).
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock. NOTE: If the windows stop before NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2 the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3. and 3.
93
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９７
Moonroof
Opening or closing the

moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Close Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
Tilt before opening or closing it.
Open
MOONROOF SWITCH MOONROOF SWITCH
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
If equipped To tilt up the back of the moonroof, You can open and close the
The moonroof can be tilted up in the press and hold the center part of the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
back for ventilation, or it can be slid switch ( ). To close the you turn off the ignition switch. The
back into the roof. Use the switch moonroof, press and hold the upper key-off delay cancels as soon as you
under the left dashboard vent to part of the switch ( ). To open open either door.
operate the moonroof. You must the moonroof, press and hold the
turn the ignition switch to the ON lower part of the switch ( ).
(II) position for the moonroof to Release the switch when the
operate. moonroof gets to the desired If you try to open the moonroof in
position. below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
94
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：２２３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９８
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push or pull the adjustment knob

right, left, up, or down to move the
ADJUSTMENT KNOB mirror.
4. When you finish, turn the

TAB adjustment knob to the center

(off) position. This turns off the
adjustment knob to keep your
settings.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before (II) position.
you start driving.
2. Turn the adjustment knob to L
The inside mirror has day and night (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
positions. The night position reduces side).
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
CONTINUED
95
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：３０３１ＳＤＰ６３０００９９
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Parking Brake
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axle.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
If equipped To apply the parking brake, pull the

The outside mirrors are heated to lever up fully. To release it, pull up
remove fog and frost. With the slightly, push the button, and lower
ignition switch in the ON (II) the lever. The parking brake
position, turn on the heaters by indicator on the instrument panel
pressing the button. The indicator in should go out when the parking
the button comes on as a reminder. brake is fully released (see page 58 ).
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. If you drive without fully releasing
the parking brake, the beeper
sounds continuously.
96
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１００
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK CONSOLE BEVERAGE HOLDER SUN VISOR

COMPARTMENT
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER
VANITY MIRROR
CENTER CD POCKET
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY
COIN POCKET POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
97
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０１
Glove Box Beverage Holders

The center console has two beverage
An open glove box can cause holders on the front. Your vehicle
serious injury to your passenger also has beverage holders in the
in a crash, even if the door pockets and the rear panels.
passenger is wearing the seat
belt. Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
Unlock Always keep the glove box that is very hot can scald you or your
closed while driving. passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
Lock holders when you open or close the
MASTER KEY doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm Spilled liquids can damage the
push. Lock or unlock the glove box upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
with the master key. components in the interior.
The glove box light comes on when

the parking lights are on.
98
０５／０７／２７１５：４３：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０２
Console Compartment Center CD Pocket

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER
Push

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray On vehicles without navigation system
pull up on the right lever and lift the located in the console compartment To open the center CD pocket, push
armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the down on the center of the lid to
left lever and lift up the armrest. unlatch it. It will swing open
To close, lower the armrest, and automatically. To close it, push the
push it down until it latches. The tray in the console compartment lid down until it latches. This pocket
has a coin holder. can store up to 12 CDs.
99
０５／０７／２７１５：４４：０４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０３
Coin Pocket Accessory Power Sockets

There are two accessory power
sockets in your vehicle. One is
located at the right of the coin
pocket, and the other is under the
armrest in the console compartment
storage area.
To use an accessory power socket,

To open the coin pocket, push the pull up the cover.
top of the lid. To close it, push the lid
down until it latches. The
compartment cannot be used as an
ashtray.

push the top of the lid.
100
０５／０７／２７１５：４４：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０４
These sockets are intended to supply Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
None of the sockets will power an

automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined SUN VISOR
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less To use the sun visor, pull it down. Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
(10 amps). When using the sun visor for the it. The lights beside the mirror come
side window, remove the support rod on when you pull up the cover.
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the sun visor extension
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor

back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
101
０５／０７／２７１５：４４：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０５
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Sunglasses Holder Coat Hook Ceiling Light

COAT HOOK DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
OFF
To open the sunglasses holder, push To use a coat hook, pull it down. The ceiling light has a three-position
on the rear edge. Make sure the Close it with a firm push. switch; ON, Door Activated (center),
holder is closed while you are driving. and OFF.
Some larger styles of sunglasses Make sure the coat hook is closed
may not fit in the holder. when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
You may also store small items in items.
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
102
０５／０７／２７１５：４４：４１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０６
Interior Lights
In the Door Activated position both Spotlights

ceiling lights, the light comes on
when you: LX and LX-V6 models
Open either door.
Unlock the driver’s door with the
master door lock switch, lock tab,

DOOR key, or the remote transmitter.
ACTIVATED
OFF
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
After both doors are closed tightly,

the light(s) dims slightly, then fade
out in about 30 seconds. EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models If you do not open either door after Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
The front ceiling light has a two- unlocking the driver’s door or lens. Push the lens again to turn it
position switch; Door Activated and removing the key from the ignition off. You can use the spotlights at all
OFF. switch, the light(s) fades out in times.
about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open without

the key is in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light(s) will go off after 3
minutes.
103
０５／０７／２７１５：４４：５２３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０７
Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights Your vehicle also has a courtesy light

in the ignition switch. This light
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT comes on when you;
Open either door.

Unlock the driver’s door.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
This light fades out about 30 seconds

after you close both doors.
DOOR LIGHT COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy light in each door On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
comes on when the door is opened, The courtesy light between the
and goes out when the door is closed. spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
104
０５／０７／２７１５：４４：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０８
Main Menu
Features
The heating and cooling system in Heating and Cooling System ....... 106
your vehicle provides a comfortable Heating and A/C ....................... 108
driving environment in all weather Climate Control System ........... 113
conditions. Climate Control System
with navigation system ........ 117
The standard audio system has Dual Temperature Control .......... 121
many features. This section de- Climate Control Sensors .............. 123
scribes those features and how to Audio System ................................ 124
Features
use them. AM/FM/CD Player .................. 126
AM/FM/CD Changer ............. 136
On all models except the 4-cylinder LX AM/FM/CD Changer
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio with navigation system ........ 149
system that requires a code number AM/FM Radio Reception ............ 164
to enable it. XM Satellite Radio Reception .... 166
Protecting Your CDs .................... 169
The security system helps to Caring for the Tape Player .......... 170
discourage vandalism and theft of Remote Audio Controls ................ 171
your vehicle. Radio Theft Protection ................. 172
Setting the Clock .......................... 173
Security System ............................ 174
Cruise Control ............................... 175
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ................................ 178
105
０５／０７／２７１５：４５：１１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１０９
Heating and Cooling System
Read the appropriate pages in this Manual System

section for operation of the heating (LX,EX and LX-V6 models)
and cooling systems installed in your
vehicle.
See pages 108 to 112 for the

manual system.
See pages 113 to 116 for the

automatic system.
See pages 117 to 120 for the Automatic System

automatic system with navigation (EX-L and EX-V6 models without navigation system)
system.
U.S. models Canadian models
You can control the driver and the
passenger side temperature
independently.
The dual temperature control is
referred to page 121 to 122 .
106
０５／０７／２７１５：４５：１６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１０
Heating and Cooling System
Automatic A/C System with navigation system

(EX-L and EX-V6 models)
U.S. models shown.
Features
107
０５／０７／２７１５：４５：２５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１１
Heating and A/C
LX, EX, and LX-V6 models Fan Control Dial

Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Temperature Control Dial

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE Turning this dial clockwise increases
CONTROL DIAL the temperature of the airflow.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator above the button is on
AIR CONDITIONING REAR WINDOW
(A/C) BUTTON DEFOGGER when the A/C is on.
BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON MODE BUTTONS
108
０５／０７／２７１５：４５：４９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１２
Heating and A/C
Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button Air flows from the defroster
When the recirculation indicator is This button turns the rear window vents at the base of the windshield.
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defogger off and on (see page 72 ).
sent throughout the system again. When you select or ,
When the indicator is off, air is Mode Control the system automatically switches to
brought in from the outside of the Use the mode control buttons to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
vehicle (fresh air mode). select the vents air flows from. Some In this case, you cannot turn the A/C
air will flow from the dashboard off.
Features
The outside air intakes for the corner vents in all modes.
heating and cooling system are at Each time you press a mode button, When you select , the system
the base of the windshield. Keep this the indicator above the button is on. automatically switches to fresh air
area clear of leaves and other debris. mode.
Air flows from the center
The system should be left in fresh and corner vents in the dashboard. MAX A/C Button
air mode under almost all conditions. The system automatically
Keeping the system in recirculation Airflow is divided between turns on the A/C,
mode, particularly with the A/C off, the vents in the dashboard and the selects , and switches to
can cause the windows to fog up. floor vents. recirculation mode. Each indicator
above the button is on when MAX
Switch to recirculation mode when Air flows from the floor A/C is turned on.
driving through dusty or smoky vents.
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode. Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
109
０５／０７／２７１５：４６：０４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１３
Heating and A/C
Ventilation Using the Heater Using the A/C

The flow-through ventilation system The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load
draws in outside air, circulates it warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine
through the interior, then exhausts it will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page
through vents near the rear window. feel warm air coming from the 64 ). If it moves near the red zone,
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge
1. Set the temperature to the lower reading returns to normal.
limit. 1. Select .
2. Make sure the A/C is off. When you select , the system 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
3. Select and fresh air mode. automatically switches to the fresh button. The indicator above the
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. air mode. button comes on when a fan speed
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. is selected.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with 2. Make sure the temperature is set
the temperature control dial. to maximum cool.
3. Select .
4. If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
110
０５／０７／２７１５：４６：１９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１４
Heating and A/C
If the interior is very warm, you can Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost
cool it down more rapidly by partially Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the
opening the windows, turning on the moisture from the air. When used in windows:
A/C, and setting the fan to combination with the heater, it
maximum speed in fresh air mode. makes the interior warm and dry and 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
can prevent the windows from high for faster defrosting.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C: fogging up. 2. Select . The system
1. Set the fan to the desired speed. automatically switches to fresh air
Features
2. Select the MAX A/C mode. The 1. Turn the fan on. mode and turns on the A/C. The
system automatically turns on the 2. Turn on the air conditioning. A/C indicator will not come on if it
A/C, selects and switches 3. Select and fresh air mode. was previously off.
to recirculation mode. 4. Adjust the temperature to your 3. Adjust the temperature so the
3. Make sure the temperature is set preference. airflow feels warm.
to maximum cool. 4. Select to help clear the
Once the engine is warmed up, this rear window.
setting is suitable for all driving 5. To increase airflow to the
conditions. windshield, close the corner vents.
CONTINUED
111
０５／０７／２７１５：４６：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１５
Heating and A/C
When you switch to or To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To Turn Everything Off
from or , the From the Windows Turning the fan speed control dial all
A/C will stay on or off depending on 1. Select . The system the way to the left shuts the system
how it was set previously. automatically switches to fresh air off.
mode and turns on the A/C. The
When you switch to , from A/C indicator will not come on if it Keep the system off for short
or , the A/C stays on. was previously off. periods only.
This helps prevent the windows from 2. Select .
rapidly fogging up when the air is 3. Set the fan and temperature To keep stale air and mustiness
suddenly routed away from the controls to maximum level. from collecting, you should have
windshield. If you want to turn the the fan running at all times.
A/C off, press and release the A/C To clear the windows faster, you can
button until the indicator in the close the dashboard corner vents by
button comes on and then goes off. rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have

a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
112
０５／０７／２７１５：４６：４７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１６
Climate Control System
EX-L and EX-V6 models EX-L and EX-V6 models

Automatic Operation
without navigation system (Canadian models) The automatic climate control
(U.S. models) system adjusts the fan speed and
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE airflow levels to maintain the interior
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE temperature you select.
DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY
1. Press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button comes on.
Features
2. Set the desired temperature by
turning the driver’s side
temperature control dial.
On U.S. models
FAN CONTROL You will see AUTO in the system’s
BUTTONS display.
A/C BUTTON On Canadian models
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE You will see FULL AUTO in the
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE system’s display.
CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
OFF BUTTON BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON CONTINUED
113
０５／０７／２７１５：４７：０１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１７
When you turn the passenger’s side Semi-automatic Operation Fan Control Buttons
temperature control dial, the You can manually select various Select the fan speed by pressing the
indicator in the DUAL button comes functions of the climate control fan control buttons ( or ).
on and the driver’s side and system when it is in full automatic The fan speed is shown in vertical
passenger’s side temperature can be mode. All other features remain bars in the display.
controlled independently (see page automatically controlled.
121 ). Temperature Control Dials
On U.S. models Turn these dials to the desired
The system automatically selects the Making any manual selection causes temperature. The temperature
proper mix of conditioned and/or the word AUTO in the display to go setting is shown in the display.
heated air that will, as quickly as out.
possible, raise or lower the interior The driver and passenger can select
temperature to your preference. On Canadian models independent temperature settings.
Making any manual selection causes
When you set the temperature to its the word FULL in the display to go
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit out.
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not

come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
114
０５／０７／２７１５：４７：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１８
Dual Button Recirculation Button Windshield Defroster Button

Press the DUAL button to select When the recirculation indicator is This button turns the windshield
dual temperature control mode (see on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defrost on and off.
page 121 ). sent throughout the system again. When you push this button, air flows
When the indicator is off, air is from the defroster vents at the base
When you press the DUAL button brought in from the outside of the of the windshield, and the system
again (indicator turns off), both vehicle (fresh air mode). automatically switches to fresh air
sides adjust to the driver’s side mode and turns on the A/C. When
Features
temperature. The outside air intakes for the the indicator in the button is on, the
heating and cooling system are at passenger’s temperature cannot be
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button the base of the windshield. Keep this set separately from the driver’s.
Press the A/C button to turn the air area clear of leaves and other debris.
conditioning on and off. You will see Rear Window Defogger Button
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. The system should be left in fresh This button turns the rear window
air mode under almost all conditions. defogger off and on (see page72 ).
When you turn the A/C off, the Keeping the system in recirculation
system cannot regulate the inside mode, particularly with the A/C off,
temperature if you set the can cause the windows to fog up.
temperature control buttons below
the outside temperature. Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
115
０５／０７／２７１５：４７：３２３１ＳＤＰ６３００１１９
Mode Control To Turn Everything Off

Use the MODE button to select the If you press the OFF button, the
vents the air flows from. Some air climate control system shuts off
will flow from the dashboard corner completely.
vents in all modes.
Keep the system off for short
Each time you press the MODE periods only.
button, the display shows the mode
selected. To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
Air flows from the center the fan running at all times.
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between

the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor

vents.

116
０５／０７／２７１５：４７：４３３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２０
EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system Voice Control System
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated by voice
DRIVER’S SIDE control. See the navigation section in
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY your quick start guide for an
overview of this system, and the
TEMPERATURE PASSENGER’S SIDE navigation system manual for
DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
complete details.
Features
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) ICONS Automatic Operation
A/C BUTTON The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
MODE ICONS airflow levels to maintain the interior
OFF BUTTON FAN CONTROL temperature you select.
ICONS
DRIVER’S SIDE In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE interior temperature is
CONTROL BUTTONS
independently regulated for the
RECIRCULATION PASSENGER’S SIDE driver and passenger. If the driver’s
BUTTON TEMPERATURE side of the vehicle is getting too
CONTROL BUTTONS
DEFROST BUTTON much sun, the system will adjust to a
lower temperature.
DUAL BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

CONTINUED
117
０５／０７／２７１５：４７：５４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２１
1. Press the AUTO button. The The system automatically selects the Semi-automatic Operation
indicator in the button comes on. proper mix of conditioned and/or You can manually select various
heated air that will, as quickly as functions of the climate control
2. Set the desired temperature by possible, raise or lower the interior system when it is in full automatic
pressing the driver’s side temperature to your preference. mode. All other features remain
temperature control buttons. Press automatically controlled.
▲ to raise the temperature or ▼ When you set the temperature to its
to lower it. The selected lower limit ( ) or its upper limit If you press the A/C button next to
temperature will show in the upper ( ), the system runs at full the display, the manual selections
display. cooling or heating only. It does not will show in the display. Making any
regulate the interior temperature. manual selection causes the
When you press the passenger’s side indicator in the AUTO button to turn
temperature control buttons, the In cold weather, the fan will not off.
indicator in the DUAL button comes come on automatically until the
on and the driver’s side and heater starts to develop warm air.
passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently (see page
121 ).
118
０５／０７／２７１５：４８：０９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２２
Fan Control Dual Button Recirculation Button

Select the fan speed by pressing the Press the DUAL button to select When the recirculation indicator is
A/C button to view the display, then dual temperature control mode (see on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
press any of the fan control icons. page 121 ). sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
Temperature Control Buttons When you press the DUAL button brought in from the outside of the
Press these buttons (▲ or ▼) to the again (indicator turns off), both vehicle (fresh air mode).
desired temperature. The sides adjust to the driver’s side
Features
temperature setting is shown in the temperature. The outside air intakes for the
upper display. heating and cooling system are at
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/ the base of the windshield. Keep this
The driver and passenger can select Icons area clear of leaves and other debris.
independent temperature settings. Press the A/C button to view the
display. Touching ON or OFF in the The system should be left in fresh
display turns the air conditioning on air mode under almost all conditions.
and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C Keeping the system in recirculation
OFF in the display. mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside Switch to recirculation mode when
temperature if you set the driving through dusty or smoky
temperature control buttons below conditions, then return to fresh air
the outside temperature. mode.
119
０５／０７／２７１５：４８：２７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２３
Windshield Defroster Button Mode Control To Turn Everything Off

This button turns the windshield Use the mode control icons to select If you press the OFF button, the
defrost on and off. the vents the air flows from. Some climate control system shuts off
When you push the button, air flows air will flow from the dashboard completely.
from the defroster vents at the base corner vents in all modes.
of the windshield, and the system Keep the system off for short
automatically switches to fresh air Press the A/C button to view the periods only.
mode and turns on the A/C. When display, then touch any of the mode
the indicator in the button is on, the icons on the display. To keep stale air and mustiness
passenger’s temperature cannot be from collecting, you should have
set separately from the driver’s. Air flows from the center the fan running at all times.
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Rear Window Defogger Button When the climate control system is
This button turns the rear window Airflow is divided between turned off, the temperature in the
defogger off and on (see page 72 ). the vents in the dashboard and the upper display also turns off.
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor

vents.

120
０５／０７／２７１５：４８：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２４
Dual Temperature Control
On EX-L and EX-V6 models without Without navigation system

navigation system
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
With navigation system TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
Your vehicle has four temperature CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
Features
control buttons, two for the driver, DUAL BUTTON
and two for the passenger.
The driver’s side and the passenger’s

side can be controlled independently With navigation system
by adjusting these dials or buttons
when the indicator in the DUAL
button is on.
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS
DUAL BUTTON
CONTINUED
121
０５／０７／２７１５：４８：４５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２５
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

Push AUTO or to turn on the
system. The selected temperatures
appears in the display (in the upper
display with the navigation system). DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
adjusting the driver’s side
temperature control dial or buttons.
To set the driver’s side temperature

differently than the passenger’s,
press the DUAL button, then turn
the driver’s control dial or press the
▲ or ▼ buttons on the driver’s side.
To set the passenger’s side
differently than the driver’s, turn the
passenger’s control dial or press the
▲ or ▼ buttons on the passenger’s
side. You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL
button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
122
０５／０７／２７１５：４８：５１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２６
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Features
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
123
０５／０７／２７１５：４８：５９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２７
Audio System
To operate your vehicle’s audio AM/FM/CD Player

system refer to the appropriate (LX models)
pages below.
For FM/AM/CD Player systems,

see pages 126 thru 135 .
For AM/FM/CD Changer

systems without navigation, see
page 136 thru 148 .
For AM/FM/CD Changer

systems with navigation, see page
149 to thru 163 .
124
０５／０７／２７１５：４９：０９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２８
Audio System
AM/FM/CD Changer
(EX-L and EX-V6 models without navigation system)
(EX and LX-V6 models) U.S. models Canadian models
Features
AM/FM/CD Changer with navigation system
(EX-L and EX-V6 models)
U.S. models.
125
０５／０７／２７１５：４９：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１２９
AM/FM/CD Player
LX models To Play the AM/FM Radio

The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
AUTO SELECT Turn the system on by pushing the
STEREO INDICATOR BUTTON PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the

AM/FM SCAN BUTTON radio was last tuned to is displayed.
BUTTON To change bands, press the AM/
FM button. On the FM band, ST
SEEK BAR TUNE BAR
will be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not
PRESET BARS
available.
SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
126
０５／０７／２７１５：４９：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３０
AM/FM/CD Player
To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples Preset − Each side of the bars (1−
You can use any of five methods to all the stations with strong signals on 6) can store one frequency on AM
find radio stations on the selected the selected band. To activate it, and two frequencies on FM.
band: tune, seek, scan, the press the SCAN button, then release
preset bars, and auto select. it. You will see SCAN in the display. 1. Select the desired band, AM or
The system will scan for a station FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
TUNE − Use the tune bar to tune with a strong signal. When it finds two frequencies with each side of
the radio to a desired frequency. one, it will stop and play that station the preset bar.
Features
Press the side of the bar to tune for about 5 seconds. If you do
to a higher frequency, and press the nothing, the system will then scan 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
side to tune to a lower for the next strong station and play it function to tune the radio to a
frequency. for 5 seconds. When it plays a station desired station.
that you want to listen to, press the
SEEK − The seek function SCAN button again. 3. Pick a preset number (1−6), you
searches up and down from the want for that station. Press the left
current frequency to find a station or right side of the bar, and hold it
with a strong signal. To activate it, until you hear a beep.
press the or side of the
bar, then release it. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if

your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
127
０５／０７／２７１５：４９：４３３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３１
AM/FM/CD Player
AUTO SELECT − If you are You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after Adjusting the Sound
traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset bar if auto select Press the SOUND button repeatedly
longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for every to display the bass (BAS), treble
you can use the auto select feature to preset bar. (TRE), fader (FAD), and balance
find stations in the local area. (BAL) settings.
If you do not like the stations auto
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’ select has stored, you can store BAS − Adjusts the bass.
flashes in the display, and the system other frequencies on the preset bars
goes into scan mode for several as previously described. TRE − Adjusts the treble.
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in To turn off auto select, press the FAD − Adjusts the fader, or the
the preset bars. A. SEL button. This restores the front-to-back strength of the sound.
presets you originally set.
BAL − Adjusts the balance, or side-
to-side strength of the sound.
Each mode is shown in the display as

it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in the
display.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
128
０５／０７／２７１５：４９：５４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３２
AM/FM/CD Player
LX models
To Play a CD
To play a CD, the ignition switch
AM/FM BUTTON TRACK NUMBER must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON(II) position.
SCAN/REPEAT BUTTON
You operate the CD player with
the same controls used for the
radio. To select the CD player,
Features
press the CD/AUX button. You
CD/AUX RANDOM will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. The
BUTTON BUTTON number of the track playing is
shown in the display. The system
will continuously play a disc until
you change modes.
SEEK/SKIP Insert a CD into the CD slot. The

BAR drive will pull the CD in the rest of
the way to play it. When the
system reaches the end of the disc,
it will return to the beginning and
play the disc again.
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm)
PWR/VOL KNOB discs without using an adapter
ring.
CONTINUED
129
０５／０７／２７１５：５０：０５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３３
AM/FM/CD Player
To play the radio when a CD is To Change or Select Tracks SCAN − The scan function samples
playing, press the AM/FM button. SEEK/SKIP − Each time you all the tracks on the disc in the order
Press the CD/AUX button again to press and release , the player they are recorded on the CD. To
switch back to the CD player. skips forward to the beginning of the activate it, press and hold the SCAN
next track. Press and release to button. You will see SCAN in the
To play a tape when a CD is playing, skip backward to the beginning of display. You will get a 10 second
insert a tape in the player (optional). the current track. Press it again to sampling of each track on the CD.
If a tape is in the player, press the skip to the beginning of the previous Press the SCAN button again to get
CD/AUX button. Press the CD/AUX track. out of the system and play the last
button again to switch back to the track sampled.
CD player. To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold or . REPEAT − To continuously replay
If you turn the system off while a CD a track, press and release the RPT
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL button. You will see RPT in the
knob or by turning off the ignition, display. Press it again to turn it off.
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD RANDOM − Press and release the
will begin playing where it left off. RDM button to play the tracks in
random order. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
130
０５／０７／２７１５：５０：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３４
AM/FM/CD Player
To Stop Playing a CD Operating the Optional CD To select the CD changer, press the
Press the eject button ( ) to Changer CD/AUX button. The disc and track
remove the CD. If you eject the CD, An optional six or eight disc CD numbers will be displayed. To select
but do not remove it from the slot, changer is available for your vehicle a different disc, use the preset 5
the system will automatically reload from your dealer. (DISC −) side or preset 6 (DISC ＋)
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in side of the preset bar. To select the
pause mode. To begin playing, press This disc changer uses the same previous disc, press the preset 5
the CD/AUX button. controls used for the in-dash CD (DISC −), or preset 6 (DISC ＋) to
Features
player or the radio. select the next disc in sequence.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the AM/FM radio while a CD is Load the desired CDs into the If you select an empty slot in the
playing. To play the CD, press the magazine, and load the magazine magazine, the changer will search
CD/AUX button. into the changer according to the for the next available CD to load and
instructions that came with the unit. play.
If a tape is in the optional tape player,
press the CD/AUX button to switch If there are no CDs in the changer,
to the tape while a CD is playing. the display will flash, and you will
Press the CD/AUX button again to have to select another mode.
switch back to the CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CD

is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
131
０５／０７／２７１５：５０：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３５
AM/FM/CD Player
CD Player Error Messages

If you see an error message in the Error Message Cause Solution
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.
cannot clear the error message, take FOCUS Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
the vehicle to your dealer. Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation.
Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
132
０５／０７／２７１５：５０：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３６
AM/FM/CD Player
Optional CD Changer Error

Messages Error Message Cause Solution
If you see an error message in the
display while operating the optional Press the magazine eject button, pull the
CD changer, find the cause in the magazine out, and check for an error message.
chart to the right. If you cannot clear FOCUS Error Insert the magazine again. If the message does
the error message, take the vehicle not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
to your dealer. out, see your dealer.
Features
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, and check for an error message.
Mechanical Error Insert the magazine again. If the message does
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
133
０５／０７／２７１５：５０：４４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３７
AM/FM/CD Player
LX models To Play a Tape

Optional
AM/FM BUTTON The ignition switch must be in the
REPEAT TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
INDICATOR position. Make sure the open side of
the tape is facing right, then insert
the tape most of the way into the slot.
REPEAT The system will pull the tape in the
CD/AUX BUTTON rest of the way and begin to play it.
BUTTON
The tape direction indicator comes
on to show you which side of the
DOLBY
INDICATOR tape is playing. The ▲ indicates the
side you inserted upward is now
playing. If you want to play the other
side, press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar. When
the player reaches the end of the
SEEK/SKIP BAR tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side.
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
134
０５／０７／２７１５：５０：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３８
AM/FM/CD Player
Dolby＊ noise reduction comes on To switch to the AM/FM radio or SKIP − Press the side to find
when you insert a tape. The CD player while a tape is playing, the beginning of the current song or
indicator in the display also press the AM/FM or CD/AUX passage. Press the side to find
comes on. If the tape was not button. To change back to the tape the beginning of the next song or
recorded in Dolby, turn it off by player, push the CD/AUX button. passage. When the system reaches
pressing the preset 4 (NR) side of the beginning of a song or passage, it
the preset bar. Dolby remains off Tape Search Functions begins to play it.
until you press the preset bar again. FF/REW − To rewind the tape,
Features
push the preset 1 (REW) side of the REPEAT − Press the RPT button
＊
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under preset bar. You will see REW in the to continuously play a song or
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing display. To fast forward the tape, passage. You will see RPT displayed.
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol push the preset 2 (FF) side of the The track will repeat until you press
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories preset bar. You will see FF displayed. the RPT button again.
Licensing Corporation. Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of the
bars to take the system out of rewind NOTE: The skip and repeat
To Stop Playing a Tape or fast forward. functions use silent periods on the
To remove the tape, press the eject tape to find the end of a song or
button on the tape player. If you passage. These features may not
want to turn the player off, press the work if there is almost no gap
PWR/VOL knob or turn off the between selections, a high noise
ignition. The tape will remain in the level, or a silent period in the middle
drive. When you turn the system of a selection.
back on, the tape will be in pause
mode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar.
135
０５／０７／２８１３：３７：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１３９
AM/FM/CD Changer
EX, EX-L, and all V6 models without navigation system

To Play the AM/FM Radio
AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
A.SEL PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
BUTTON button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the

SEEK BAR TUNE BAR radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
PRESET displayed if the station is broadcast-
BARS ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction in
AM is not available.
On U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models

For information on XM satellite radio,
see page 139 .
SCAN BUTTON SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
NOTE: This illustration shows the U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models.
Other models are similar.
136
０５／０７／２８１３：３８：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４０
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples Preset − Each side of the bars (1−
You can use any of five methods to all the stations with strong signals on 6) can store one frequency on AM
find radio stations on the selected the selected band. To activate it, and two frequencies on FM.
band: tune, seek, scan, the press the SCAN button, then release
preset bars, and auto select. it. You will see SCAN in the display. 1. Select the desired band, AM or
The system will scan for a station FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
TUNE − Use the tune bar to tune with a strong signal. When it finds two frequencies with each side of
the radio to a desired frequency. one, it will stop and play that station the preset bar.
Features
Press the side of the bar to tune for about 5 seconds. If you do
to a higher frequency, and press the nothing, the system will then scan 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
side to tune to a lower for the next strong station and play it function to tune the radio to a
frequency. for 5 seconds. When it plays a station desired station.
that you want to listen to, press the
SEEK − The seek function SCAN button again. 3. Pick a preset number (1−6), you
searches up and down from the want for that station. Press the left
current frequency to find a station or right side of the bar, and hold it
with a strong signal. To activate it, until you hear a beep.
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.
137
０５／０７／２８１３：３８：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４１
AM/FM/CD Changer
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after Adjusting the Sound
total of six stations on AM and pressing a preset bar if auto select Press the SOUND button repeatedly
twelve stations on FM. cannot find a strong station for every to display the bass (BAS), treble
preset bar. (TRE), fader (FAD), and balance
The preset frequencies will be lost if (BAL) settings.
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is If you do not like the stations auto
disconnected, or the radio fuse is select has stored, you can store BAS − Adjusts the bass.
removed. other frequencies on the preset bars
as previously described. TRE − Adjusts the treble.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no To turn off auto select, press the FAD − Adjusts the fader, or the
longer receive your preset stations, A. SEL button. This restores the front-to-back strength of the sound.
you can use the auto select feature to presets you originally set.
find stations in the local area. BAL − Adjusts the balance, or side-
to-side strength of the sound.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system Each mode is shown in the display as
goes into scan mode for several it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
seconds. It stores the frequencies of knob to adjust the setting to your
six AM, and twelve FM stations in liking. When the level reaches the
the preset bars. center, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in the
display.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
138
０５／０７／２８１３：３８：３１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４２
AM/FM/CD Changer
Satellite Digital Radio

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
CATEGORY INDICATOR Your vehicle is capable of receiving
CD/AUX/XM XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the
BUTTON United States except Hawaii and
Alaska. It is not available in Canada.
DISPLAY XM is a registered trademark of
Features
BUTTON
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available on U.S.
TUNE BAR
models only.
To Play XM Satellite Radio

ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX/
XM button.
SEEK/SKIP BAR
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
SCAN BUTTON PRESET BARS the volume.
PWR/VOL KNOB
139
０５／０７／２８１３：３８：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４３
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Select a Channel SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) − The SCAN − The scan function samples
When in the satellite radio mode, seek/skip function selects the all channels for 5 seconds. To
you can use any of four methods to various categories in XM, such as activate the function, push the SCAN
find channels: tune, seek/skip Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc. button. Push it again to get out of the
(category), scan, and the Push the to change the sequence.
preset bars. category forward. Push the to
change the category backward. To Preset − Each side of the preset
TUNE − search for channels within a bar can store one channel in XM1
Press the TUNE bar to change category, press the TUNE bar . and one in XM2.
channel selections. Press for
higher numbered channels and DISP − Press and release this 1. Push the CD/AUX/XM button.
for lower numbered channels. button to change the display. The (You will see XM1 or XM2.)
display changes in this sequence:
channel name, channel number, 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
category, artist name, and music title. function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset icon or number, and

hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a

total of six stations on XM1 and
six on XM2.
140
０５／０７／２８１３：３８：５７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４４
AM/FM/CD Changer
EX, EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system To Play a CD

AM/FM BUTTON TRACK NUMBER
To load or play CDs, the ignition
CD/AUX REPEAT BUTTON
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
DISC NUMBER
BUTTON (I) or the ON(II) position.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
CD/AUX/ To select the CD changer, press the
XM
RANDOM CD/AUX button (CD/AUX/XM
Features
BUTTON＊
BUTTON button on models with satellite
PRESET
BARS radio). The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
SEEK/SKIP
BAR EJECT until you change modes.
BUTTON
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
LOAD BUTTON CD LOAD CD SLOT

INDICATOR
PWR/VOL KNOB
＊: On models with Satellite Radio CONTINUED
141
０５／０７／２８１３：３９：１０３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４５
AM/FM/CD Changer
To play the radio when a CD is 3. Insert a disc into the CD slot when
playing, press the AM/FM button. the green CD load indicator comes
Press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM Do not use discs with adhesive labels. on. Insert it only about halfway;
button again to switch back to the The label can curl up and cause the the drive will pull it in the rest of
CD changer. disc to jam in the unit. the way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in
the display as the CD load
To play a tape when a CD is playing, Loading CDs in the In-dash CD indicator turns red and blinks as
insert a tape in the player (optional). Changer the CD is loaded.
If a tape is in the player, press the Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changer
CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button. holds up to six discs. You cannot load and play 3-inch
Press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM (8-cm) discs in this system.
button again to switch back to the 1. Press the LOAD button until you
CD changer. hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the 4. When the CD load indicator turns
display. green and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in the
On models with Satellite Radio screen again, insert the next CD in
To listen to satellite radio when a CD To load only one CD, press and the slot.
is playing, press the CD/AUX/XM release the LOAD button.
button. Do not try to insert a disc until
2. The disc number for an empty ‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You could
If you turn the system off while a CD position is highlighted and the red damage the audio unit.
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL CD load indicator starts blinking.
knob or by turning off the ignition, 5. Repeat this until all six positions
the disc will stay in the drive. When are loaded. If you are not loading
you turn the system back on, the CD all six positions, the system begins
will begin playing where it left off. playing the last CD loaded.
142
０５／０７／２８１３：３９：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４６
AM/FM/CD Changer
You can also load a CD into an empty To Change or Select Tracks SCAN − The scan function samples
position while a CD is playing by SEEK/SKIP − Each time you all the tracks on the selected disc in
pressing the appropriate side of a press and release , the system the order they are recorded on the
preset bar. The system stops playing skips forward to the beginning of the CD. To activate it, press and release
the current CD and starts the next track. Press and release to the SCAN button. You will see SCAN
loading sequence. It plays the CD skip backward to the beginning of in the display. You will get a 10
just loaded. the current track. Press it again to second sampling of each track on the
skip to the beginning of the previous selected CD. Press the SCAN button
Features
You operate the CD changer with track. again to get out of the system.
The numbers of the disc and track To move rapidly within a track, press D-SCAN − This function samples
playing are shown in the display. and hold or . the first track of each disc in the
order they are loaded in the CD
To select a different disc, press the changer. To activate it, select D-
appropriate side of a preset bar SCAN by pressing and holding the
(1−6) or use the preset 5 (DISC −) SCAN button. You will see D-SCAN
to select the previous disc or preset 6 in the display. You will get a 10
(DISC ＋) to select the next disc in second sampling of the first track on
sequence.If you select a loaded each CD. Press the SCAN button
position in the CD changer, the again to turn off D-SCAN.
system will try to load the CD in the
next available slot.
143
０５／０７／２８１３：３９：２８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４７
AM/FM/CD Changer
REPEAT − To continuously replay To Stop Playing a CD If a tape is in the optional tape player,
a track, press and release the RPT Press the AM/FM button to switch press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM
button. You will see RPT in the to the AM/FM radio while a CD is button to switch to the tape while a
display. Press it again to turn it off. playing. To play the CD, press the CD is playing. Press the CD/AUX or
CD/AUX button. CD/AUX/XM button again to switch
D-REPEAT − To continuously back to the CD changer.
replay the current disc, press and On models with Satellite Radio
hold the RPT button. You will see Press the AM/FM or CD/AUX/XM If you turn the system off while a CD
D-RPT in the display. Press the RPT button to switch to the AM/FM is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
button again to turn it off. radio or satellite radio while a CD is knob or by turning off the ignition,
playing. To play the CD, press the the disc will stay in the drive. When
RANDOM − Press and release the CD/AUX/XM button again. you turn the system back on, the CD
RDM button to play the tracks in will begin playing where it left off.
random order. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
144
０５／０７／２８１３：３９：３９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４８
AM/FM/CD Changer
Removing CDs from the In-dash You can also eject discs when the To select the CD changer, press the
CD Changer ignition switch is off. The disc that CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.
To remove the disc currently in play, was last selected is ejected first. The disc and track numbers will be
press the eject ( ) button. When displayed. To select a different disc,
a disc is removed from a slot, the Operating the Optional CD use the preset 5 (DISC −) side or
system automatically begins the load Changer preset 6 (DISC ＋) side of the preset
sequence so you can load another An optional eight disc CD changer is bar. To select the previous disc,
CD in that position. If you do not available for your vehicle from your press the preset 5 (DISC −), or
Features
remove the disc from the changer dealer. preset 6 (DISC ＋) to select the next
within 15 seconds, the system disc in sequence.
returns to the previous mode (AM/ This disc changer uses the same
FM or satellite radio). The disc will controls used for the in-dash CD If you select an empty slot in the
reload into the system and will changer or the radio. magazine, the changer will search
remain there in a pause mode. for the next available CD to load and
Load the desired CDs into the play.
To remove a different CD from the magazine, and load the magazine
changer, first select it with the into the changer according to the
appropriate preset bar. When that instructions that came with the unit.
CD begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
145
０５／０７／２８１３：３９：４８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１４９
AM/FM/CD Changer
CD Changer Error Messages

display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
to the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
error message, take the vehicle to a again. If the message does not disappear or the
Honda dealer. CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
Mechanical Error Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear, or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
: EX, LX-V6, Canadian EX-L, and Canadian EX-V6 models

: U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
146
０５／０７／２８１３：３９：５９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５０
AM/FM/CD Changer
EX, EX-L, and all V6 models without navigation system

To Play a Tape
Optional
REPEAT INDICATOR The ignition switch must be in the
AM/FM BUTTON
DOLBY INDICATOR ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR position. Make sure the open side of
CD/AUX the tape is facing right, then insert
BUTTON
RPT
The system will pull the tape in the
Features
BUTTON
CD/AUX rest of the way and begin to play it.
(XM)
BUTTON＊
The tape direction indicator comes
tape is playing. The ▲ indicates the
playing. If you want to play the other
side, press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar. When
the player reaches the end of the
SEEK/SKIP BAR tape, it will automatically reverse
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
＊: On models with Satellite Radio CONTINUED
147
０５／０７／２８１３：４０：０８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５１
AM/FM/CD Changer
Dolby＊ noise reduction comes on To switch to the AM/FM radio, SKIP − Press the side to find
when you insert a tape. The Satellite Radio (U.S. models), or CD the beginning of the current song or
indicator in the display also changer while a tape is playing, press passage. Press the side to find
comes on. If the tape was not the AM/FM or CD/AUX button the beginning of the next song or
recorded in Dolby, turn it off by (CD/AUX/XM button on models passage. When the system reaches
pressing the preset 4 (NR) side of with satellite radio). To change back the beginning of a song or passage, it
the preset bar. Dolby remains off to the tape player, push the CD/AUX begins to play it.
until you press the preset bar again. or CD/AUX/XM button.
REPEAT − Press the RPT button
＊
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under Tape Search Functions to continuously play a song or
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing FF/REW − To rewind the tape, passage. You will see RPT displayed.
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol push the preset 1 (REW) side of the The track will repeat until you press
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories preset bar. You will see REW in the the RPT button again.
Licensing Corporation. display. To fast forward the tape,
push the preset 2 (FF) side of the NOTE: The skip and repeat
To Stop Playing a Tape preset bar. You will see FF displayed. functions use silent periods on the
To remove the tape, press the eject Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of the tape to find the end of a song or
button on the tape player. If you bars to take the system out of rewind passage. These features may not
want to turn the player off, press the or fast forward. work if there is almost no gap
PWR/VOL knob or turn off the between selections, a high noise
ignition. The tape will remain in the level, or a silent period in the middle
drive. When you turn the system of a selection.
back on, the tape will be in pause
mode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar.
148
０５／０７／２８１３：４０：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５２
AM/FM/CD Changer
Voice Control System

The audio system for your vehicle EX-L and EX-V6 models with
navigation system
can also be operated by voice control.
See the navigation section in your
quick start guide for an overview of
this system, and the navigation
system manual for complete details.
Features
UPPER DISPLAY
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
AUDIO DISPLAY
SCAN BUTTON BUTTON
PRESET ICONS
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE/SOUND KNOB
AUTO SELECT ICON SCAN SOUND ICON

ICON
149
０５／０７／２８１３：４０：２８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５３
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station SEEK − The seek function
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to searches up and down from the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected current frequency to find a station
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, seek, scan, the with a strong signal. To activate it,
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM preset icons, and auto select. press the or side of the
button. Adjust the volume by turning bar, then release it.
the PWR/VOL knob. TUNE − Use the TUNE/SOUND
knob to tune the radio to a desired SCAN − The scan function samples
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY frequency. Turn the knob right to all stations with strong signals on the
button will also turn on the system. tune to a higher frequency, and turn selected band. To activate it, touch
the knob left to tune to a lower the SCAN icon. You will see SCAN in
The band and frequency that the frequency. the display. The system will scan for
radio was last tuned to is displayed. a station with a strong signal. When
To change bands, press the AM/FM it finds one, it will stop and play that
button. On the FM band, ST will be station for about 5 seconds.
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction in If you do nothing, the system will
AM is not available. scan for the next strong station and
play it for 5 seconds. When it plays a
For information on XM satellite radio, station you want to listen to, touch
see page 153 . the SCAN icon again.
150
０５／０７／２８１３：４０：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５４
AM/FM/CD Changer
Preset − Each preset icon can store 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
one frequency on AM, and two total of six stations on AM and pressing a preset icon if auto select
frequencies on FM. twelve stations on FM. cannot find a strong station for every
preset icon.
1. Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button The preset frequencies will be lost if
to see the preset icons. Then select your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is If you do not like the stations auto
the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 disconnected, or the radio fuse is select has stored, you can store
and FM2 let you store two removed. other frequencies on the preset icons
Features
frequencies with each preset icon. as previously described.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan traveling far from home and can no To turn off auto select, touch the
function to tune the radio to a longer receive your preset stations, AUTO SELECT icon. This restores
desired station. you can use the auto select feature to the presets you originally set.
find stations in the local area.
3. Pick the preset icon you want for
that station. Touch the icon, and Touch the AUTO SELECT icon.
hold it until you hear a beep. ‘‘A. SEL’’ flashes in the upper display,
and the system goes into scan mode
for several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset icons.
151
０５／０７／２８１３：４０：５０３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５５
AM/FM/CD Changer
Adjusting the Sound

Touch the SOUND icon or press the FADER ADJUST ICONS SOUND GRID
TUNE/SOUND knob.
If you want to adjust the sound while

the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display. BALANCE
ADJUST ICONS
BAL − Adjusts the balance, or side-
to-side strength of the sound. BASS ADJUST ICONS RETURN ICON
TREBLE ADJUST ICONS
FAD − Adjusts the fader, or the
front-to-back strength of the sound. Touch the arrows next to the BAS or The system will return to the audio
TRE icons. The adjustment shows display about 5 seconds after you
TRE − Adjusts the treble. you the current setting. Touch the stop adjusting a mode. Touch the
left or right bars on the sound grid. Return icon to go back to the audio
BAS − Adjusts the bass. Balance is equalized when the screen.
vertical lines are centered on the
grid. Touch the front or rear bars on
the sound grid. The fader is
equalized when the horizontal lines
are centered on the grid.
152
０５／０７／２８１３：４１：００３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５６
AM/FM/CD Changer
Satellite Digital Radio

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system U.S. models
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
CHANNEL INDICATOR XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States except Hawaii and
Alaska. It is not available in Canada.
CD/AUX/XM XM is a registered trademark of
Features
BUTTON XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available on U.S.
PRESET ICONS models only.
To Play XM Satellite Radio

AUDIO DISPLAY
SCAN BUTTON BUTTON ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
SEEK/SKIP BAR CH/DISC BAR Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX/XM,
TUNE KNOB button or the AUDIO DISPLAY
button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust

PWR/VOL KNOB the volume.
SCAN ICON MODE ICON
153
０５／０７／２８１３：４１：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５７
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Select a Channel SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) − The Preset − Each preset icon can store
When in the satellite radio mode, seek/skip function selects the one channel in XM1 and one in XM2.
you can use any of four methods to various categories in XM, such as
find channels: tune, seek/skip Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc. 1. Push the CD/AUX/XM button.
(category), scan, and the Push to change the category (You will see XM1 or XM2.)
preset icons. forward. Push to change the
category backward. To search for 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
TUNE − channels within a category, turn the function to tune the radio to a
Turn the TUNE knob to change TUNE knob clockwise. desired station.
channels. Turn the knob right for
higher numbered channels and left MODE − To switch between 3. Pick a preset icon, and hold it until
for lower numbered channels. channel mode and category mode, you hear a beep.
touch the MODE icon.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
SCAN − The scan function samples total of six stations on XM1 and
all channels for 5 seconds. To six on XM2.
activate the function, push the SCAN
button. Push it again to get out of Once your XM channels are preset,
scan. pressing either side of the CH/DISC
bar will select your preset channels.
154
０５／０７／２８１３：４１：２５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５８
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Play a CD
EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system To load or play CDs, the ignition
UPPER DISPLAY switch must be in the ACCESSORY
DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
(I) or the ON(II) position.
CD/AUX/XM BUTTON You operate the CD changer with
CD/AUX BUTTON＊
To select the CD changer, press the
SCAN BUTTON
CD/AUX/XM button (CD/AUX
Features
SEEK/ button on Canadian models). The
SKIP BAR number of the track playing is shown
DISC ICONS in the display. With the in-dash CD
changer, the disc and track numbers
TRACK
AUDIO DISPLAY are displayed. The system will
SCAN ICON continuously play a CD until you
BUTTON
CH/DISC BAR
change modes.
DISC
SCAN
ICON You cannot load and play 3-inch
CD SLOT (8-cm) discs in this system.
TRACK REPEAT
ICON DISC REPEAT
ICON EJECT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB RANDOM ICON
U.S. model is shown. LOAD BUTTON CD LOAD INDICATOR
＊ : On Canadian models CONTINUED
155
０５／０７／２８１３：４１：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１５９
AM/FM/CD Changer
To play the radio when a CD is If you turn the system off while a CD Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
playing, press the AM/FM button. is playing, either with the PWR/VOL Changer
Press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX knob or by turning off the ignition, Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changer
button again to switch back to the the disc will stay in the drive. When holds up to six discs.
CD changer. you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off. 1. Press the LOAD button until you
To play the tape when a CD is hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
playing, insert a tape in the player upper display.
(optional). If a tape is in the player,
press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX Do not use discs with adhesive labels. To load only one CD, press and
button. Press the CD/AUX/XM or The label can curl up and cause the release the LOAD button.
CD/AUX button again to switch disc to jam in the unit.
back to the CD changer. 2. The disc icon for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
On U.S. models CD load indicator starts blinking.
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/AUX/XM
button.
156
０５／０７／２８１３：４１：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６０
AM/FM/CD Changer
3. Insert a disc into the CD slot when You can also load a CD into an empty To Change or Select Tracks
the green CD load indicator comes position while a CD is playing by To use the controls, press the
on. Insert it only about halfway; touching a disc icon. The system AUDIO DISPLAY button.
the drive will pull it in the rest of stops playing the current CD and
the way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in starts the loading sequence. It plays TRACK SCAN − When you touch
the upper display as the CD load the CD just loaded. this icon on the audio display or
indicator turns red and blinks as press the SCAN button, you will get
the CD is loaded. You operate the CD changer with a 10 second sampling of each track
Features
the same controls used for the radio. on the current CD. You will see
You cannot load and play 3-inch The numbers of the disc and track TRACK SCAN highlighted on the
(8-cm) discs in this system. playing are shown in the display. audio screen and SCAN in the upper
These numbers also appear in the display. Press the icon or button
4. When the CD load indicator turns upper display. again to get out of track scan.
green and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in To select a different disc, touch the
the slot. appropriate disc icon or press the ▲
or ▼ side of the CH/DISC bar. If
Do not try to insert a disc until you select a loaded position in the
‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You could CD changer, the system will try to
damage the audio unit. load the CD in the next available slot.
5. Repeat this until all six positions

are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last CD loaded.
CONTINUED
157
０５／０７／２８１３：４１：５７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６１
AM/FM/CD Changer
DISC SCAN − When you touch the RANDOM − When you touch the To Stop Playing a CD
DISC SCAN icon on the audio RANDOM icon on the audio display, On U.S. models
display, the system gives you a 10 the system plays the tracks on the Press the AM/FM or CD/AUX/XM
second sampling of the first track on current CD in random order. You button to switch to the AM/FM
each disc in the in-dash CD changer. will see RANDOM highlighted on radio or satellite radio while a CD is
You will see DISC SCAN highlighted the audio screen and RDM in the playing. To play the CD, press the
on the audio screen and D-SCAN in upper display. To turn this feature CD/AUX/XM button again.
the upper display. Touch the icon off, touch RANDOM again or select On Canadian models
again to get out of disc scan. a different disc icon. Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the AM/FM radio while a CD is
TRACK RPT − When you touch SEEK/SKIP − Each time you playing. To play the CD, press the
the TRACK RPT icon, the system press and release , the system CD/AUX button.
continuously plays the same track. skips forward to the beginning of the
You will see TRACK RPT next track. Press and release to If a tape is in the optional tape player,
highlighted on the audio screen and skip backward to the beginning of press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX
RPT in the upper display. Press the the current track. Press it again to button to switch to the tape while a
icon again to get out of track repeat. skip to the beginning of the previous CD is playing. Press the CD/AUX/
track. XM or CD/AUX button again to
DISC RPT − When you touch the switch back to the CD changer.
DISC RPT icon on the audio display, To move rapidly within a track, press
the system continuously replays the and hold or . If you turn the system off while a CD
current CD. You will see DISC RPT is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
highlighted on the audio screen and CH/DISC − Press the ▲ or ▼ to knob or by turning off the ignition,
D-RPT in the upper display. Touch select an icon and play the disc. the disc will stay in the drive. When
the icon to turn the feature off. you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
158
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６２
AM/FM/CD Changer
Removing CDs from the In-dash You can also eject discs when the To select the CD changer, press the
CD Changer ignition switch is off. The disc that CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX button.
To remove the disc currently in play, was last selected is ejected first. The disc and track numbers will be
press the eject ( ) button. When displayed. To select a different disc,
you remove a disc is removed from a Operating the Optional CD use the CH/DISC bar. To select the
slot, the system automatically begins Changer previous disc, press the ▼ side, or ▲
the load sequence so you can load An optional eight disc CD changer is side to select the next disc in
another CD in that position. If you do available for your vehicle from your sequence.
Features
not remove the disc from the dealer.
changer within 15 seconds, the If you select an empty slot in the
system returns to the previous mode This disc changer uses the same magazine, the changer will search
(AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc controls used for the in-dash CD for the next available CD to load and
will reload into the system and will changer or the radio. play.
remain there in a pause mode.
Load the desired CDs into the
To remove a different CD from the magazine, and load the magazine
changer, first select it with the into the changer according to the
appropriate icon or the CH/DISC bar. instructions that came with the unit.
When that CD begins playing, press
the eject button. Continue pressing
the eject button to remove all the
discs from the changer.
159
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６３
AM/FM/CD Changer
CD Changer Error Messages

display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
to the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
error message, take the vehicle to a again. If the message does not disappear or the
Honda dealer. CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
Mechanical Error Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear, or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
160
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６４
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Play a Tape
EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system
Optional
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
REPEAT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR position. Make sure the open side of
the tape is facing right, then insert
UPPER DISPLAY The system will pull the tape in the
Features
rest of the way and begin to play it.
CD/AUX/XM
BUTTON The tape direction indicator comes
AUDIO DISPLAY tape is playing. The ▲ indicates the
CD/AUX BUTTON＊ BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR CH/DISC BAR playing. If you want to play the other
side, touch the PLAY/PROG icon.
PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE/SOUND KNOB When the player reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
REWIND ICON NOISE REDUCTION
(NR) ICON
PLAY/PROG ICON REPEAT ICON
FAST FORWARD ICON

U.S. model is shown.
＊ : On Canadian models
161
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：３２３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６５
AM/FM/CD Changer
First push the AUDIO DISPLAY To Stop Playing a Tape Tape Search Functions
button before selecting any of the To remove the tape, press the eject FF/REW − To fast forward the
audio icons on the audio screen. button on the tape player. If you tape, push the upper side (▲) of the
want to turn the player off, press the CH/DISC bar. You will see FF in the
Dolby＊ noise reduction comes on PWR/VOL knob or turn off the upper display. To rewind the tape,
when you insert a tape. The NR ignition. The tape will remain in the push the lower side (▼) of the CH/
indicator in the display also comes drive. When you turn the system DISC bar. You will see REW
on. If the tape was not recorded in back on, the tape will be in pause displayed. Press either side of the
Dolby, turn it off by touching the NR mode. Touch the PLAY/PROG icon. CH/DISC bar or touch the FF, REW
icon. Dolby remains off until you or PLAY/PROG icon to take the
touch the NR icon again. To switch to the AM/FM radio, system out of rewind or fast forward.
Satellite Radio (U.S. models), or CD
＊
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under changer while a tape is playing, press
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing the AM/FM or CD/AUX/XM button
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol (CD/AUX button on Canadian
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories models). To change back to the tape
Licensing Corporation. player, push the CD/AUX/XM or
CD/AUX button.
162
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：３７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６６
AM/FM/CD Changer
SKIP − Press the side to find NOTE: The skip and repeat
the beginning of the current song or functions use silent periods on the
passage. Press the side to find tape to find the end of a song or
the beginning of the next song or passage. These features may not
passage. When the system reaches work if there is almost no gap
the beginning of a song or passage, it between selections, a high noise
begins to play it. level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
Features
REPEAT − Touch the RPT icon to
continuously play a song or passage.
You will see RPT displayed in the
upper display. The track will repeat
until you touch the RPT icon again.
163
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：４９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６７
AM/FM Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 AM station, you will notice the sound
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). volume becoming weaker, and the
Stations on the FM band are station drifting in and out. If you are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
Stations must use these exact Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
frequencies. It is fairly common for go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
stations to round-off the frequency in completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
their advertising, so your radio could the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
display a frequency of 100.9 even are close to.
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
164
０５／０７／２８１３：４２：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６８
AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
165
０５／０７／２８１３：４３：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１６９
XM Satellite Radio Reception
Satellite Radio Signals

Signal is weaker in Available on some U.S. models
Signal may be these areas. Satellite radio receives signals from
blocked by two satellites to produce clear, high-
mountains or
large obstacles quality digital reception. It offers
to the south. many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
The XM satellites are in orbit over

the equator; therefore, objects south
SATELLITE of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be

blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
GROUND
REPEATER
166
０５／０７／２８１３：４３：１７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７０
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: Receiving Satellite Radio Service
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly If your XM Radio service has expired
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for or you purchased your vehicle from
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s a previous owner, you can listen to a
authority to operate the equipment. sampling of the broadcasts available
Driving on the south side of an on XM Satellite Radio. With the
east/west mountain road. ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
Driving on the north side of a (I) or ON (II) position, push the
Features
large commercial truck on an PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
east/west road. system, and press the CD/AUX/XM
Driving in tunnels. button. A variety of music types and
Driving on a road beside a vertical styles will play.
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
There may also be other geographic

situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
CONTINUED
167
０５／０７／２８１３：４３：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７１
If you decide to purchase XM After you’ve registered with XM

satellite radio service, contact XM Radio, keep your audio system in the
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at Satellite Radio mode while you wait
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give for activation. This should take about
them your radio I.D. number and 30 minutes.
your credit card number.
To get your radio I.D. number: While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
Turn the TUNE knob or press the area with good reception. Once your
TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
display. Your I.D. will appear in the or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
display. and you’ll be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
168
０５／０７／２８１３：４３：３７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７２
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs

When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat.
recording must be closed for it to
be used by the system. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
Wipe across the CD from the center
CD-RW discs will not work in this to the outside edge.
unit.
A new CD may be rough on the
Play only standard round CDs. inner and outer edges. The small
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
drive or cause other problems. can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Handle your CDs properly to skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
prevent damage and skipping. these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. Never try to insert foreign objects in
The label can curl up and cause the the CD player/CD changer or the
disc to jam in the unit. magazine.
169
０５／０７／２８１３：４３：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７３
Caring for the Tape Player
Optional If the tape is loose, tighten it by If you see the error message
The tape player picks up dirt and turning the hub with a pencil or your ‘‘ ’’ on the display (on the
oxides from the tape. This finger. If the label is peeling off, upper display on models with
contamination builds up over time remove it or it could cause the tape navigation system), press the tape
and causes the sound quality to to jam in the player. Never try to eject button to remove the tape from
degrade. To prevent this, you should insert a warped or damaged tape in the unit. Make sure the tape is not
clean the player after every 30 hours the player. damaged. If the tape will not eject or
of use. the error message stays on after the
Store tapes in their cases to protect tape ejects, take the vehicle to your
If you do not clean the tape player them from dust and moisture. Never dealer.
regularly, it may eventually become place tapes where they will be
impossible to remove the exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
contamination with a normal or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
cleaning kit available. moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or Never try to insert foreign objects
jam the drive. into the tape player.
170
０５／０７／２８１３：４３：５５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７４
Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON
The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a CD, the system
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button, hold it until track each time you press the top
the desired volume is reached, then (＋) of the CH button. Press the
release it. bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
The MODE button changes the it twice to return to the previous
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
Features
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the display.
CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if
equipped). On models with satellite If you are playing a tape in the
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON radio system, you can also select optional tape player, press the top
XM1 and XM2. (＋) of the CH button to advance to
On all models except the 4-cylinder LX the next selection. Press the bottom
Three control buttons for the audio If you are listening to the radio, use (−) to go back to the previous
system are mounted in the steering the CH button to change stations. selection. The system senses a silent
wheel hub. These buttons let you Each time you press the top (＋) of period, then resumes playing.
control basic audio functions without the button, the system goes to the
removing your hand from the wheel. next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
171
０５／０７／２８１３：４４：０５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７５
Radio Theft Protection
On on models except the 4-cylinder LX If your vehicle’s battery is You will have to store your favorite
Your vehicle’s audio system will disconnected or goes dead, or the stations on each side of the preset
disable itself if it is disconnected radio fuse is removed, the audio bars (1−6) or icons after the system
from electrical power for any reason. system will disable itself. If this begins working. Your original
To make it work again, you must happens, you will see ‘‘ ’’/ settings were lost when the power
enter a specific code using the preset ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency display was disconnected.
bars or the TUNE knob. Because the next time you turn on the system.
there are hundreds of number Use the preset bars to enter the code.
combinations possible, making the The code is on the radio code card
system work without knowing the included in your owner’s manual kit.
exact code is nearly impossible. When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and If you make a mistake entering the
serial numbers. It is best to store this code, do not start over; complete the
card in a safe place at home. In sequence, then enter the correct
addition, you should write the audio code. You have ten tries to enter the
system’s serial number in this owner’s correct code. If you are unsuccessful
manual. in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
If you lose the card, you must obtain trying again.
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
172
０５／０７／２８１３：４４：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７６
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system CLOCK

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
PRESET BARS
To set the time, press the clock set
(SOUND) button until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
Features
blink.
Press and hold the H (preset 4) side CLOCK SET BUTTON

of the bar until the hour advances to EX-L and EX-V6 models without
the desired time. Press and hold the navigation system is shown.
M (preset 5) side of the bar until the
minutes advance to the desired time. the displayed time is after the half On models with navigation system
hour, the clock sets forward to the The upper display shows the time
Press the clock set (SOUND) button beginning of the next hour. when the ignition switch is in the
again to enter the set time. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
For example: The navigation system receives
You can quickly set the time to the 1:06 will reset to 1:00 signals from the Global Positioning
nearest hour. If the displayed time is 1:53 will reset to 2:00 System (GPS), and the displayed
before the half hour, pressing the time is updated automatically by the
clock set (SOUND) button until you GPS. Refer to the navigation system
hear a beep, then pressing the R owner’s manual to set up the time.
(preset 6) side of the bar sets the
clock back to the previous hour. If
173
０５／０７／２８１３：４４：２８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７７
Security System
The security system helps to protect SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR With the system set, you can still
your vehicle and valuables from theft. open the trunk with the remote
The horn sounds and a combination transmitter without triggering the
of headlights (low beam), parking alarm. The alarm will sound if the
lights, side marker lights, and trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
taillights flash if someone attempts opened with the trunk release handle
to break into your vehicle or remove or the emergency trunk opener.
the radio. This alarm continues for 2
minutes, then it stops. To reset an The security system will not set if
alarming system before the 2 the hood, trunk, or either door is not
minutes have elapsed, unlock the fully closed. Before you leave the
driver’s door with the key or the vehicle, make sure the doors, trunk,
remote transmitter. and hood are securely closed.
Once the security system is set,
The security system automatically opening either door without using NOTE: To see if the system is set
sets 15 seconds after you lock the the key or the remote transmitter, after you exit the vehicle, press the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the the hood, or the trunk will cause the LOCK button on the remote
system to activate, you must lock the system to alarm. It also alarms if the transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
doors from the outside with the key, radio is removed from the dashboard system is set, the horn will beep
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote or the wiring is cut. once.
transmitter. The security system
indicator on the instrument panel Do not attempt to alter this system
starts blinking immediately to show or add other devices to it.
you the system is setting itself.
174
０５／０７／２８１３：４４：３８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７８
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) SET button on the steering wheel.
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
accelerator pedal. It should be used on the instrument panel comes on
for cruising on straight, open to show the system is now
highways. It is not recommended for activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. Cruise control may not hold the set
Features
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
Improper use of the cruise CANCEL DECEL/SET RES/ACCEL
slow down. This will cancel the
control can lead to a crash. BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the CRUISE button on the The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
when traveling on open steering wheel. The CRUISE on the instrument panel will come
highways in good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument back on.
panel will come on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising automatic transmission may
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). downshift to hold the set speed.
175
０５／０７／２８１３：４４：４８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１７９
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with cruise control turned on,
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
NOTE: If you need to decrease your completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL speed quickly, apply the brakes as off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
button. When you reach the you normally would. will return to the set cruising speed.
desired cruising speed, release the
button. Press and hold the DECEL/SET Resting your foot on the brake or
button. Release the button when clutch pedal cause cruise control to
Push on the accelerator pedal until you reach the desired speed. cancel.
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the DECEL/ To slow down in very small
SET button. amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button. Each time you do this,
To increase your speed in very your vehicle will slow down about
small amounts, tap the RES/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up Tap the brake or clutch pedal
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
176
０５／０７／２８１３：４５：００３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８０
Cruise Control
Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

When you push the CANCEL button,
CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Features
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on, and the vehicle will
accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.
CANCEL BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
You can cancel cruise control in any the system off and erases the
of these ways: previous cruising speed.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel.
177
０５／０７／２８１３：４５：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８１
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
On EX-V6 model They do not have the safety feature Training HomeLink
The HomeLink universal that causes the motor to stop and Before you begin − If you just
transceiver built into your vehicle reverse if an obstacle is detected received your vehicle and have not
can be programmed to operate up to during closing, increasing the risk of trained any of the buttons in
three remotely controlled devices injury. HomeLink before, you should erase
around your home, such as garage any previously learned codes before
doors, lighting, or home security Important Safety Precautions training the first button.
systems. Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information To do this, press and hold the two
General Information that came with your garage door outside buttons on the HomeLink
If you are training HomeLink to opener or other equipment you transceiver for about 20 seconds,
operate a garage door or gate, you intend to operate with HomeLink. If until the red indicator flashes.
should unplug the motor for that you do not have this information, Release the buttons, then go to step
device during training. Repeatedly contact the manufacturer of the 1.
pressing the remote control button equipment. If you are training the second or
could burn out the motor. third buttons, go directly to step 1.
For quick and accurate training,
HomeLink stores the code in a make sure the remote control 1. Unplug the garage door opener
permanent memory. There should transmitter for the device (garage motor from the electrical outlet.
be no need to retrain HomeLink if door, automatic gate, security
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is system, etc.) has a fresh battery. 2. Hold the end of the garage door
disconnected. If your garage door opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
opener was manufactured before HomeLink. Make sure you are not
April 1982, you may not be able to blocking your view of the red
program HomeLink to operate it. indicator in HomeLink.
178
０５／０７／２８１３：４５：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８２
If the red indicator in HomeLink second.

continues to flash slowly (does If the button works,
not flash rapidly), your remote programming is complete.
transmitter may stop If the button does not work go
transmitting after a short time. to step 6.
Go to step 4.
6. Push and hold the HomeLink
4. Press and hold the remote button for a few seconds, then
Features
transmitter button and one of the watch the red indicator on
HomeLink buttons at the same HomeLink.
time. While continuing to hold the If the indicator stays on or
HomeLink button, press and flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
release the remote transmitter thru 5.
3. Press and hold the remote button every 2 seconds. If the indicator flashes rapidly
transmitter button and one of the If the red indicator in HomeLink for 2 seconds then stays on, you
HomeLink buttons at the same begins to flash slowly at first, have a rolling code transmitter:
time. then rapidly, release both Go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
If the red indicator in HomeLink buttons, and go to step 5. Code System’’ (see page 180 ).
begins to flash slowly at first, If the red indicator in HomeLink
then rapidly, release both continues to flash slowly (does 7. Repeat these steps to train the
buttons, and go to step 5. not begin to flash rapidly), other two HomeLink buttons to
repeat steps 2 thru 4. operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
5. Plug in the garage door opener around your home (lighting,
motor, then test the HomeLink automatic gate, security system,
button by pushing it for about 1 etc.).
179
０５／０７／２８１３：４５：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８３
Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
System HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
or variable code. Information from button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
the remote control and the garage This should turn off the training
door opener are needed before indicator on the garage door
HomeLink can operate the garage opener unit. (Some systems may
door opener. require you to press the button up
to three times.)
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the 6. Press the HomeLink button again.
proper garage door opener code. It should operate the garage door.
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps.
HomeLink’’ procedure.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your

garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
180
０５／０７／２８１３：４５：５４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８４
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 3 thru 6 under interference that may cause undesired
Features
before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation.
178 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Customer Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
181
Main Menu
０５／０７／２８１３：４６：０１３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８６
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 184

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 184
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 185
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 185
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing
luggage or packages. The the Hood ................................. 186
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 188
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 189
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 190
read the information in this section Accessories and Modifications .... 191
Before Driving
first. Carrying Cargo .............................. 193
183
０５／０７／２８１３：４６：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８７
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation In addition, in order to maintain good

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate performance, fuel economy, and
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump emissions control, we strongly
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use recommend, in areas where it is
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause available, the use of gasoline that
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping does NOT contain manganese-based
noise that can lead to engine damage. fuel additives such as MMT.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration. On EX-V6 model with manual Use of gasoline with these additives
transmission may adversely affect performance,
Avoid hard braking for the first If you drive with the low engine and cause the malfunction indicator
200 miles (300 km). speed (below than about 1,000 rpm), lamp on your instrument panel to
you may feel the engine knocking. In come on. If this happens, contact
Do not change the oil until the this case, you can use premium your authorized dealer for service.
scheduled maintenance time. unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 91 or higher to Some gasoline today is blended with
Do not tow a trailer. prevent the engine from knocking. oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
You should also follow these We recommend using quality operate on oxygenated gasoline
recommendations with an gasolines containing detergent containing up to 10 percent ethanol
overhauled or exchanged engine, or additives that help prevent fuel by volume and up to 15 percent
when the brakes are replaced. system and engine deposits. MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
184
０５／０７／２８１３：４６：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８８
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
If you notice any undesirable Refueling

operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another Gasoline is highly flammable
brand of gasoline. and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
For further important fuel-related Push when handling fuel.
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide. Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Before Driving
Wipe up spills immediately.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest

to the service station pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pushing

on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.
TETHER
ATTACHMENT
FUEL FILL CAP
CONTINUED
185
０５／０７／２８１３：４６：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３００１８９
Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
You may hear a hissing sound as until it clicks at least once. If you
pressure inside the tank escapes. do not properly tighten the cap, HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
The fuel fill cap is attached to the the malfunction indicator lamp
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the may come on (see page 277 ). You
attachment on the fuel fill cap into will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
the slit on the fuel fill door. CAP’’ message on the information
display.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave it latches.
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off 1. Park the vehicle, and set the
even though the tank is not full, parking brake. Pull the hood
there may be a problem with your release handle located under the
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery lower left corner of the dashboard.
system. The system helps keep The hood will pop up slightly.
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
186
０５／０７／２８１３：４６：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９０
GRIP
Before Driving
CLIP
LATCH 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
2. Put your fingers under the front 3. 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
edge of the hood. The hood latch Pull the support rod out of its clip Lift the hood up most of the way.
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull by holding the grip, and insert the The hydraulic supports will lift it
this handle until it releases the end into the designated hole in the up the rest of the way and hold it
hood, then lift the hood. hood. up.
If the hood latch handle moves To close the hood, lift it up slightly To close the hood, lower the hood to
stiffly, or if you can open the hood to remove the support rod from about a foot (30 cm) above the
without lifting the handle, the the hole. Put the support rod back fender, then press down firmly with
mechanism should be cleaned and into its holding clip. Lower the your hands. Make sure it is securely
lubricated. hood to about a foot (30 cm) above latched.
the fender, then let it drop. Make
sure it is securely latched.
187
０５／０７／２８１３：４６：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９１
Oil Check
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK DIPSTICK
4-cylinder models (Orange Handle) 6-cylinder models (Orange Loop) 4-cylinder models
Wait a few minutes after turning the 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
engine off before you check the oil. cloth or paper towel. check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
1. Remove the dipstick (orange 3. Insert it all the way back in its hole. marks.
handle/loop).
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 232 .
188
０５／０７／２８１３：４７：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９２
Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK MAX RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK MAX
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
MIN
6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models MIN
Look at the coolant level in the Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is Checks on page 226 for information
between the MAX and MIN lines. If about checking other items on your
it is below the MIN line, see Adding vehicle.
Engine Coolant on page 236 .
189
０５／０７／２８１３：４７：１６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９３
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Try to maintain a constant speed.

Always maintain your vehicle Every time you slow down and
according to the maintenance speed up, your vehicle uses extra
messages displayed in the fuel. Use cruise control when
information display. See Owner’s appropriate.
Maintenance Checks (see page
226 ). Combine several short trips into
one.
For example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ The air conditioning puts an extra
which uses more fuel. load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
The build-up of snow or mud on ventilation when possible.
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid

acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear

possible.
190
０５／０７／２８１３：４７：２７３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９４
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
be sure to read the following vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 280 ) or interfere with
Before Driving
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding the proper operation of your
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. vehicle.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any electronic
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular accessory, have the installer
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and contact your dealer for assistance.
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should If possible, have your dealer
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s inspect the final installation.
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes. Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
191
０５／０７／２８１３：４７：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９５
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires

Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
non-Honda components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering your vehicle with a systems ineffective.
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle,
clearance can allow the consult your dealer.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a

non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they

are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
192
０５／０７／２８１３：４７：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９６
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT DOOR POCKET storage areas:
CENTER POCKET Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
Before Driving
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX

CONTINUED
193
０５／０７／２８１３：４７：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９７
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the 5. Determine the combined weight
The maximum load for your vehicle combined weight of occupants and of luggage and cargo being loaded
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure cargo should never exceed 850 in the vehicle. That weight may
includes the total weight of all lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. not safely exceed the available
occupants, cargo, and accessories, [The placard is on the driver’s cargo and luggage load capacity in
and the tongue load if you are towing doorjamb.] step 4.
a trailer.
2. Determine the combined weight 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
of the driver and passengers that trailer, load from your trailer will
will be riding in your vehicle. be transferred to your vehicle.
Overloading or improper Consult this manual to determine
loading can affect handling and 3. Subtract the combined weight of how this reduces the available
stability and cause a crash in the driver and passengers from cargo and luggage load capacity of
which you can be hurt or killed. 850 pounds or 395 kilograms. your vehicle (see page 213 ).
Follow all load limits and other 4. The resulting figure equals the
loading guidelines in this available amount of cargo and
manual. luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.)
194
０５／０７／２８１３：４８：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９８
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
vehicle, all passengers, accessories, Compartment a Roof Rack
cargo, and trailer tongue load must Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the
not exceed the Gross Vehicle be thrown around and hurt floor of the trunk, placing the
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both as far forward as possible. Tie
are on a label on the driver’s Do not put any items on top of the down items that could be thrown
doorjamb. rear shelf. They can block your about the vehicle during a crash or
view and be thrown around the sudden stop.
vehicle during a crash.
Before Driving
If you fold down the back seat, tie
Be sure items placed on the floor down items that could be thrown
behind the front seats cannot roll about the vehicle during a crash or
under the seats and interfere with sudden stop.
proper operation of the pedals, the
front seats, or the advanced front If you carry large items that
airbags. prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
Keep the glove box closed while passenger area. To avoid the
driving. If it is open, a passenger possibility of carbon monoxide
could injure their knees during a poisoning, follow the instructions
crash or sudden stop. on page 50 .
CONTINUED
195
０５／０７／２８１３：４８：１５３１ＳＤＰ６３００１９９
Carrying Cargo
If you carry any items on a roof Trunk Hooks Cargo Net

rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
If you use an accessory roof rack,

the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
There are hooks on the floor and On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
sides of the trunk. They can be used The cargo net can be used to help
to install a net for securing items. hold down items stored in the trunk.
To use the cargo net, hook it to the
buttons on the floor and sides of the
trunk. You can use the cargo net in
several configurations by hooking it
to different buttons.
When you are not using the cargo

net, store it in the spare tire well.
196
０５／０７／２８１３：４８：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２００
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 198

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 199
conditions, and how to operate the Manual Transmission.................... 200
manual and automatic transmissions. Automatic Transmission............... 203
It also includes important Parking ............................................ 207
information on parking your vehicle, Braking System.............................. 208
the braking system, the vehicle Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 209
stability assist (VSA) system, and Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
facts you need if you are planning to System......................................... 211
tow a trailer. Towing a Trailer ............................ 213
Driving
197
０５／０７／２８１３：４８：３３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０１
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 6. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 82 ).
your vehicle.
7. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and page 95 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 73 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
9. Make sure the doors and the
3. Check that the trunk is fully trunk are securely closed and
closed. locked.
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire 10.Fasten your seat belt. Check that
looks low, use a gauge to check its your passengers have fastened
pressure. their seat belts (see page 14 ).
5. Check that any items you may be 11.When you start the engine, check
carrying are stored properly or the gauges and indicators in the
fastened down securely. instrument panel (see page 55 ).
198
０５／０７／２８１３：４８：４４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０２
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 5. If the engine does not start within
pedal, turn the ignition key to the 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. Do not hold right away, repeat step 4 with the
electrical accessories to reduce the key in the START (III) accelerator pedal pressed halfway
the drain on the battery. position for more than 15 seconds down. If the engine starts, release
at a time. If the engine does not pressure on the accelerator pedal
3. Manual Transmission: start right away, pause for at least so the engine does not race.
Push the clutch pedal down all the 10 seconds before trying again.
way. The START (III) position 6. If the engine fails to start, press
does not function unless the clutch the accelerator pedal all the way
pedal is pressed. down, and hold it there while
The immobilizer system protects your starting to clear flooding. If the
Driving
Automatic Transmission: vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- engine still does not start, return
Make sure the shift lever is in coded key (or other device) is used, the to step 5.
Park. Press on the brake pedal. engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 75 .
The engine is harder to start in cold

weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
199
０５／０７／２８１３：４８：５３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０３
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
On 4-cylinder models with 5-speed from fifth to reverse instead of sixth shifting to a lower gear. This extra
manual transmission (see page 202 ). braking can help you maintain a safe
On EX-V6 model with 6-speed manual speed and prevent your brakes from
transmission When shifting up or down, make overheating while going down a
The manual transmission is sure you push the clutch pedal down steep hill. Before downshifting,
synchronized in all forward gears for all the way, shift to the next gear, make sure the engine speed will not
smooth operation. It has a lockout so and let the pedal up gradually. When go into the tachometer’s red zone in
you cannot shift directly from fifth to you are not shifting, do not rest your the lower gear.
reverse. foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
200
０５／０７／２８１３：４９：０１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０４
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points With 6-speed manual transmission

Drive in the highest gear that lets
Rapid slowing or speeding-up the engine run and accelerate Shift up Normal acceleration
can cause loss of control on smoothly. This will give you good
slippery surfaces. If you crash, fuel economy and effective 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
you can be injured. emissions control. The following 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
shift points are recommended: 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h)
Use extra care when driving on 4th to 5th 47 mph (75 km/h)
slippery surfaces. With 5-speed manual transmission 5th to 6th 52 mph (83 km/h)
Shift up Normal acceleration

On EX-V6 model
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with an 1st to 2nd 15 mph (25 km/h)
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
vehicle parked outside for a long 3rd to 4th 40 mph (65 km/h)
time on a hot day, be careful before 4th to 5th 50 mph (80 km/h)
moving the shift lever. Because of
the heat, the shift lever may be
extremely hot. If the outside
temperature is low, the shift lever
feels cold.
201
０５／０７／２８１３：４９：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０５
Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout 2. If you are still unable to shift to
If you exceed the maximum speed 6-speed manual transmission only reverse, apply the parking brake,
for the gear you are in, the engine The manual transmission has and turn the ignition key to the
speed will enter into the tachometer’s lockout so you cannot accidentally ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel shift from fifth to reverse instead of position.
the engine cut in and out. This is sixth while the vehicle is moving. If
caused by a limiter in the engine’s you cannot shift to reverse when the 3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
computer controls. The engine will vehicle is stopped: reverse.
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone. 4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the If you need to use this procedure to
tachometer’s red zone. shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,

move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
202
０５／０７／２８１３：４９：２３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０６
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) SHIFT LEVER
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
Driving
have the transmission checked by RELEASE BUTTON
These indicators between the tacho- your dealer as soon as possible.
meter and speedometer show which To shift from any position to Park,
position the shift lever is in. press firmly on the brake pedal, and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY(I) position.
CONTINUED
203
０５／０７／２８１３：４９：３１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０７
To shift from: Do this: Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake
P to R Press the brake pedal and cally locks the transmission. Use pedal and press the release button
press the release button. Park whenever you are turning off or on the front of the shift lever to shift
R to P starting the engine. To shift out of from Park to reverse. To shift from
N to R Press the release button. Park, you must press on the brake reverse to neutral, come to a
D3 to 2 pedal and have your foot off the complete stop and then shift. Press
2 to 1 accelerator pedal. Press the release the release button before shifting
1 to 2 button on the front of the shift lever into reverse from neutral.
2 to D3 to move it.
D3 to D Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
D to N Move the lever. If you have done all of the above and need to restart a stalled engine, or if
D to D3 still cannot move the lever out of it is necessary to stop briefly with
N to D Park, see Shift Lock Release on the engine idling. Shift to the Park
R to N page 206 . position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
You must also press the release brake pedal when you are moving
button to shift into Park. To avoid the shift lever from neutral to
transmission damage, come to a another gear.
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
204
０５／０７／２８１３：４９：４３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０８
Drive (D) − Use this position for Use second gear: Engine Speed Limiter
your normal driving. The For more power when climbing. If you exceed the maximum speed
transmission automatically selects a To increase engine braking when for the gear you are in, the engine
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your going down steep hills. speed will enter into the tachometer’s
speed and acceleration. You may For starting out on a slippery red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
notice the transmission shifting up at surface or in deep snow. the engine cut in and out. This is
higher engine speeds when the To help reduce wheel spin. caused by a limiter in the engine’s
engine is cold. This helps the engine When driving downhill with a computer controls. The engine will
warm up faster. trailer. run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Drive (D3) − This position is First (1) − To shift from second to
similar to D, except only the first first, press the release button on the
Driving
three gears are selected. Use D3 front of the shift lever. This position
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, locks the transmission in first gear.
or to provide engine braking when By upshifting and downshifting
going down a steep hill. D3 can also through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
keep the transmission from cycling operate this transmission much like
between third and fourth gears in a manual transmission without a
stop-and-go driving. clutch pedal.
Second (2) − To shift to second,

press the release button on the front
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
205
０５／０７／２８１３：４９：５４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２０９
Shift Lock Release COVER

This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release RELEASE
BUTTON
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition NOTCH

switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover. Using 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
metal fingernail file, carefully pry cover. Make sure the notch on the
on the notch of the cover to 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the left side. Press the
remove it. press the release button on the brake pedal, and restart the engine.
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral. If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
206
０５／０７／２８１３：５０：０４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１０
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or equipped) and the windows are curb. If you have a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
If your vehicle has an automatic turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb. If you have a manual
before you put the transmission in in the trunk or take them with you. transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the Lock the doors. Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the fully released before driving away.
Driving
transmission. Check the indicator on the Driving with the parking brake
instrument panel to verify that the partially set can overheat or
security system is set. damage the rear brakes.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
207
０５／０７／２８１３：５０：１５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１１
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front Check the brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the The front and rear disc brakes on all
wheels may be disc or drum, brakes moderately to see if they feel models have audible brake wear
depending on the model. A power normal. If not, apply them gently and indicators. All models except for the
assist helps reduce the effort needed frequently until they do. Be extra 4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakes
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps cautious in your driving. as standard equipment.
you retain steering control when
braking very hard. Braking System Design If the brake pads need replacing, you
The hydraulic system that operates will hear a distinctive, metallic
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes has two separate circuits. screeching sound when you apply
the brakes applied lightly, builds up Each circuit works diagonally across the brake pedal. If you do not have
heat, increases wear, and reduces the vehicle (the left-front brake is the brake pads replaced, they will
their effectiveness. It also keeps connected with the right-rear brake, screech all the time. It is normal for
your brake lights on all the time, etc.). If one circuit should develop a the brakes to occasionally squeal or
confusing drivers behind you. problem, you will still have braking squeak when you apply them.
at two wheels.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
208
０５／０７／２８１３：５０：２３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１２
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on like a conventional system, but
the brake pedal very hard before the without anti-lock. You should have
The ABS also balances the front-to- ABS activates. However, you may your dealer inspect your vehicle as
rear braking distribution according feel the ABS activate immediately if soon as possible.
to vehicle loading. you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If the indicator comes on while
You should never pump the brake pedal. driving, test the brakes as instructed
Driving
Let the ABS work for you by always on page 278 .
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
209
０５／０７／２８１３：５０：３１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１３
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the front-to-rear braking vehicle. It only helps with the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
distribution system may also be shut steering control during braking. lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
down. distance between vehicles under
ABS will not prevent a skid that those conditions.
Test your brakes as instructed on results from changing direction
page 278 . If the brakes feel normal, abruptly, such as trying to take a
drive slowly and have your vehicle corner too fast or making a sudden
repaired by your dealer as soon as lane change. Always drive at a safe
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking speed for the road and weather
which could cause the rear wheels to conditions.
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control. ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
On all V6 models when you are braking hard. Severe
The VSA indicator will come on or sharp steering wheel movement
along with the ABS indicator. can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
210
０５／０７／２８１３：５０：４１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１４
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
On all V6 models VSA Activation Indicator Without VSA, your vehicle still has
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) normal braking and cornering ability,
system helps to stabilize the vehicle When VSA activates, you will see the but it does not have VSA traction and
during cornering if the vehicle turns VSA activation indicator blink. stability enhancement.
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction VSA System Indicator
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this If the VSA system indicator comes
by regulating the engine’s output, on while driving, pull to the side of
and by selectively applying the the road when it is safe, and turn off
brakes. the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
Driving
When VSA activates, you may notice system indicator stays, or comes
that the engine does not respond to back on while driving, have the VSA
the accelerator in the same way it system inspected by your dealer.
does at other times.
If the indicator does not come on
The VSA system cannot enhance the when the ignition switch is turned to
vehicle’s driving stability in all the ON (II) position, there may be a
situations and does not control your problem with the VSA system. Have
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is your dealer inspect your vehicle as
still your responsibility to drive and soon as possible.
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
211
０５／０７／２８１３：５０：５３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１５
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you VSA and Tire Sizes
start the engine, even if you turned it Driving with varying tire or wheel
off the last time you drove the sizes may cause the VSA to
vehicle. malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 258 ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you

need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page 264 ).
VSA OFF SWITCH If you install winter tires, make sure

they are the same size as those that
This switch is under the left vent. were originally supplied with your
Press it to turn the VSA system on vehicle. Exercise the same caution
and off. during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
When VSA is off, the VSA activation VSA.
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Pressing the switch again turns the
system back on.
212
０５／０７／２８１３：５１：０３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１６
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits

primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your vehicle
Driving
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed. Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that
maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
Check the loading of your trailer and everything in or on it puts on the hitch should be
vehicle and trailer carefully must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). approximately 10 percent of the
before starting to drive. Towing a load that is too heavy total trailer weight. Too much
can seriously affect your vehicle’s tongue load reduces front-tire
handling and performance. It can traction and steering control. Too
also damage the engine and little tongue load can make the
drivetrain. trailer unstable and cause it to
sway.
CONTINUED
213
０５／０７／２８１３：５１：１２３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１７
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Gross Axle Weight Rating Checking Loads
start by loading 60 percent of the (GAWR): The best way to confirm that vehicle
load toward the front of the trailer The maximum allowable weight and trailer weights are within limits
and 40 percent toward the rear, then on the vehicle axles is: is to have them checked at a public
re-adjust the load as needed. scale.
4-cylinder models:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (LX) Using a suitable scale or a special
(GVWR): 2,195 lbs (995 kg) tongue load gauge, check the tongue
The maximum allowable weight of on the front axle load the first time you set up a
the vehicle, all occupants, all 1,960 lbs (890 kg) towing combination (a fully-loaded
accessories, all cargo, and the on the rear axle vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load is: (EX, EX-L) tongue load whenever the conditions
2,225 lbs (1,010 kg) change.
4-cylinder models: on the front axle
(LX) 1,985 lbs (900 kg)
4,080 lbs (1,850 kg) on the rear axle
(EX, EX-L)
4,125 lbs (1,870 kg) 6-cylinder models:
2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)
6-cylinder models: on the front axle
4,300 lbs (1,950 kg) 2,005 lbs (910 kg)
on the rear axle
214
０５／０７／２８１３：５１：２７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１８
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Safety Chains See your trailer dealer for more
Accessories Always use safety chains when you information on installing electric
Towing can require a variety of tow a trailer. Make sure the chains brakes.
equipment, depending on the size of are secured to the trailer and hitch,
your trailer, how it will be used, how and that they cross under the tongue Trailer Lights
much load you are towing, and and can catch the trailer if it Trailer lights and equipment must
where you tow. becomes unhitched. Leave enough comply with federal, state, province,
slack to allow the trailer to turn and local regulations. Check the
Discuss your needs with your trailer corners easily, but do not let the requirements for the areas where
sales or rental agency, and follow the chains drag on the ground. you plan to tow, and use only
guidelines in this section. Also make equipment designed for your vehicle.
sure that all equipment is properly Trailer Brakes
Driving
installed and maintained, and that it Honda requires that any trailer with Since lighting and wiring vary by
meets federal, state, province, and a total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) or trailer type and brand, you should
local regulations. more be equipped with its own have a qualified technician install a
electric or surge-type brakes. suitable connector between the
Hitches vehicle and the trailer. Improper
Any hitch used on your vehicle must If you choose electric brakes, be equipment or installation can cause
be properly bolted to the underbody. sure they are electrically actuated. damage to your vehicle’s electrical
Do not attempt to tap into your system and affect your vehicle
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No warranty.
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
215
０５／０７／２８１３：５１：３８３１ＳＤＰ６３００２１９
Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are
Many states and Canadian provinces When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated, and the trailer
require special outside mirrors when driving away, be sure to check the tires and spare are inflated as
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, following: recommended by the trailer
you should install special mirrors if maker.
you cannot clearly see behind you, or The vehicle has been properly
if the trailer creates a blind spot. serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
Ask your trailer sales or rental lights are in good operating
agency if any other items are condition.
recommended or required for your
towing situation. All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any

other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your

vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
216
０５／０７／２８１３：５１：５１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２０
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill,
The added weight, length, and Make turns more slowly and wider use the foot brake or parking brake.
height of a trailer will affect your than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the vehicle in
vehicle’s handling and performance, smaller arc than your vehicle, and it place by pressing on the accelerator,
so driving with a trailer requires can hit or run over something the as this can cause the automatic
some special driving skills and vehicle misses. Allow more time and transmission to overheat.
techniques. distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the When driving down hills, reduce
For your safety and the safety of trailer to jackknife or turn over. your speed, and shift down to second
others, take time to practice driving gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
maneuvers before heading for the Driving on Hills remember, it will take longer to slow
open road, and follow the guidelines When climbing hills, closely watch down and stop when towing a trailer.
Driving
below. your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (hot) mark, turn the air Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Towing Speeds and Gears conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Crosswinds and air turbulence
Drive slower than normal in all necessary, pull to the side of the caused by passing trucks can disrupt
driving situations, and obey posted road to let the engine cool. your steering and cause trailer to
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. sway. When being passed by a large
Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At If the automatic transmission shifts vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
higher speeds, the trailer may sway frequently while going up a hill, shift steer straight ahead. Do not try to
or affect vehicle handling. If you to D3. make quick steering or braking
have an automatic transmission, use corrections.
D position when towing a trailer on
level roads.
CONTINUED
217
０５／０７／２８１３：５１：５８３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２１
Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in first or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
218
０５／０７／２８１３：５２：０４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２２
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 220

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 221
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 228
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 230
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 232
This section also includes Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 233
instructions on how to read the Engine Coolant ............................... 236
maintenance messages in the Windshield Washers ..................... 238
information display, a maintenance Transmission Fluid ........................ 239
record, and instructions for simple Automatic Transmission........... 239
maintenance tasks you may want to Manual Transmission ............... 242
take care of yourself. Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 243
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 245
If you have the skills and tools to Timing Belt ..................................... 246
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Lights .............................................. 246
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 251
to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats ...................................... 251
page 305 for information on how to Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 252
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Wiper Blades .................................. 252
Tires ................................................ 254
Checking the Battery .................... 260
Vehicle Storage .............................. 262
219
０５／０７／２８１３：５２：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２３
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the can decide whether or not you
engine and exhaust system cool should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and before touching any parts.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
220
０５／０７／２８１３：５２：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２４
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items in the displayed on the engine oil life
information display to show you ENGINE OIL LIFE SELECT/RESET display according to this table:
when you should have your dealer DISPLAY KNOB
perform engine oil replacement and Calculated Engine Displayed
indicated maintenance service. Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 % 100 %
Based on the engine operating 90 %−81 % 90 %
conditions and accumulated engine 80 %−71 % 80 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 70 %−61 % 70 %
your vehicle calculates the remaining 60 %−51 % 60 %
engine oil life and displays it as a 50 %−41 % 50 %
percentage. 40 %−31 % 40 %
30 %−21 % 30 %
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20 %−16 % 20 %
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15 %−11 % 15 %
(II) position, and press the Select/ 10 %−6 % 10 %
Reset knob repeatedly until the 5 %−1 % 5%
engine oil life display appears (see 0% 0%
page 63 ).
CONTINUED
221
０５／０７／２８１３：５２：３７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２５
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE required at the time of the oil change
ITEM CODE(S) INDICATOR (see page 227 ).
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn ‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ message
the ignition switch to the ON (II) along with the same maintenance
position. The maintenance minder item code(s), every time you turn the
indicator will also come on, and the ignition switch to the ON (II)
maintenance item code(s) for other position.
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
222
０５／０７／２８１３：５２：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２６
Maintenance Minder
The maximum total mileage shown

is ‘‘−9999.’’
You can change the information

display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the Select/Reset knob.
When the engine oil life display is 0

percent or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
remains on even if you change the
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is If you still do not perform the information display.
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator indicated maintenance, you will see a
will be blinking. The display comes negative mileage. It is displayed Immediately have the service
on every time you turn the ignition when you drive over 10 miles (for performed, and make sure to reset
switch to the ON (II) position. When U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian the display as described in the next
you see this message, have the models) after seeing the 0 percent page.
indicated maintenance performed by message. Afterward, it shows your
your dealer as soon as possible. driving distance if you continue to
drive. Immediately have the
indicated maintenance done by your
dealer.
223
０５／０７／２８１３：５２：５７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２７
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Items Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by

someone other than your dealer,
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM reset the maintenance minder as
follows: 3. Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 10 seconds. The engine
All maintenance items displayed in 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON oil life indicator and the
the information display are in code. (II) position. maintenance item code(s) will
For an explanation of these blink.
maintenance codes, see page 227 . 2. Press the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
display is displayed.
224
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２８
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance However, service at a dealer is not

Precautions mandatory to keep your warranties
If you have the required service in effect. Maintenance may be done
done but do not reset the display, or by any qualified service facility or
reset the display without doing the person who is skilled in this type of
service, the system will not show the automotive service. Make sure to
proper maintenance intervals. This have the service facility or person
can lead to serious mechanical reset the display as previously
problems because you will no longer described. Keep all receipts as proof
have an accurate record of when of completion, and have the person
maintenance is needed. who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
Your authorized Honda dealer warranty booklet for more
4. Press the Select/Reset knob for knows your vehicle best and can information.
Maintenance
more than 5 seconds. The provide competent, efficient service.
maintenance item code(s) will We recommend using Honda parts
disappear, and the engine oil life and fluids whenever you have
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
CONTINUED
225
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３００２２９
Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate See page 246 .
establishment or individual using page listed.
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards. Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 188 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level − Check the
with ＃ will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, all you fill the fuel tank. See page 189 .
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Automatic transmission − Check
intervals indicated by the the fluid level monthly. See page
information display. 239 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 244 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
256 .
226
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：２７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３０
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
Check parking brake adjustment every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie-rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
Driveshaft boots from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every
Brake hoses and line (including ABS) 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission fluid
Fuel lines and connections＃ Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher
1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months after transmission and transfer temperatures. This
the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 226 . maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluid transmission and transfer fluid changed at
every 3 years. 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). (48,000 km). (For A/T only:)
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy. 4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(V6 engine only)
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under−110°F, 29°C), replace every 60,000 mile
(U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
227
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：３５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３１
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
228
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：４２３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３２
Maintenance Record
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
Maintenance
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
229
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：４８３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３３
Fluid Locations
4-cylinder Models
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID

(Gray cap) (5-speed manual
transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE OIL

(Orange handle) FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC

(Blue cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING ENGINE

FLUID (Red cap) COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
230
０５／０７／２８１３：５３：５４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３４
Fluid Locations
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID
(Orange loop) (Gray cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(6-speed manual
transmission only)
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
Maintenance
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP
231
０５／０７／２８１３：５４：０２３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３５
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Install the engine oil fill cap, and
fill cap on top of the valve cover. tighten it securely. Wait a few
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so minutes, and recheck the oil level.
you do not spill. Clean up any spills Do not fill above the upper mark; you
immediately. Spilled oil could could damage the engine.
damage components in the engine
compartment.
232
０５／０７／２８１３：５４：１５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３６
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred Synthetic Oil Changing the Oil and Filter
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is You may use a synthetic motor oil if Always change the oil and filter
highly recommended that you use it meets the same requirements according to the maintenance
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for given for a conventional motor oil: it messages shown on the information
optimum engine protection. Make displays the API Certification Seal, display. The oil and filter collect
sure the API Certification Seal says and it is the proper weight. You must contaminants that can damage your
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ follow the oil and filter change engine if they are not removed
intervals shown on the information regularly.
display.
Changing the oil and filter requires
Engine Oil Additives special tools and access from
Your vehicle does not require any oil underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
additives. Additives may adversely should be raised on a service station-
affect the engine or transmission type hydraulic lift for this service.
Maintenance
performance and durability. Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
Ambient Temperature mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

The oil viscosity or weight is normal operating temperature,
provided on the container’s label. then shut it off.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy. CONTINUED
233
０５／０７／２８１３：５４：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３７
Changing the Oil and Filter
WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER OIL FILTER
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models
2. Open the hood, and remove the 3. Remove the oil filter, and let the 4. Check the oil filter to make sure
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil remaining oil drain. A special its gasket did not stick to the
drain bolt and washer from the wrench (available from your engine block. A stuck gasket could
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil dealer) is required. cause an oil leak.
into an appropriate container.
234
０５／０７／２８１３：５４：３９３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３８
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 8. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
then reinstall the drain bolt. Start the engine. The oil pressure
Tighten the drain bolt to: indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
(4-cylinder models) engine, and check your work.
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
9. Let the engine run for several
(6-cylinder models) minutes, then check the drain bolt
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m) and oil filter for leaks.
7. Refill the engine with the 10.Turn off the engine and let it sit
6-cylinder models recommended oil. for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
5. Install a new oil filter according to Engine oil change capacity necessary, add more oil.
Maintenance
the instructions that come with it. (including filter):
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting (4-cylinder models)
surface of a new oil filter. 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
(6-cylinder models) change your own oil, please dispose of
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
235
０５／０７／２８１３：５４：５０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２３９
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely

empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
tank is at or below the MIN line, add freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant Removing the radiator cap
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. is pre-mixed with 50 percent while the engine is hot can
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. antifreeze and 50 percent water. cause the coolant to spray out,
Never add straight antifreeze or seriously scalding you.
plain water.
Always let the engine and
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not radiator cool down before
available, you may use another removing the radiator cap.
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
236
０５／０７／２８１３：５５：０３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４０
Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP 4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 3. The coolant level should be up to 5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add Fill it to halfway between the MAX
coolant if it is low. and MIN marks. Put the cap back
When the radiator and engine are on the reserve tank.
cool, relieve any pressure in the Pour the coolant slowly and
cooling system by turning the carefully so you do not spill any.
radiator cap counterclockwise, Clean up any spill immediately; it
without pressing down. could damage components in the
engine compartment.
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning 4. Put the radiator cap back on, and
counterclockwise. tighten it fully. CONTINUED
237
０５／０７／２８１３：５５：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４１
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
Windshield Washers LEVEL GAUGE

Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
On Canadian models: The low washer

level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 60 ). 4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
Do not add any rust inhibitors or windshield washer fluid. This
other additives to your vehicle’s increases the cleaning capability and
cooling system. They may not be prevents freezing in cold weather.
compatible with the coolant or
engine components. When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
238
０５／０７／２８１３：５５：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４２
Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid
LEVEL GAUGE Automatic Transmission

4-cylinder models
DIPSTICK
GUIDE
6-cylinder models UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Maintenance
DIPSTICK
Do not use engine antif reeze or a Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
vinegar/water solution in the at normal operating temperature. the transmission securely as
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze shown in the illustration.
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while 1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
a vinegar/water solution can damage Shut off the engine. Make sure the notch in the rubber
the windshield washer pump. Use only cap fits in the dipstick guide and
commercially-available windshield 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) that you push the dipstick in all
washer f luid. from the transmission, and wipe it the way.
with a clean cloth.
CONTINUED
239
０５／０７／２８１３：５５：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４３
Transmission Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick and check 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Automatic Transmission
the fluid level. It should be into the transmission securely as 6-cylinder models
between the upper and lower shown in the illustration.
marks.
Make sure the notch fits in the
5. If the level is below the lower dipstick guide and the dipstick is
mark, add fluid into the dipstick down all the way.
hole to bring it to the upper mark.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully contact your dealer.
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
compartment. DIPSTICK
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Check the fluid level with the engine
(automatic transmission fluid). If at normal operating temperature.
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic 1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
transmission fluid as a temporary Shut off the engine.
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
Have the transmission flushed and from the transmission, and wipe it
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as with a clean cloth.
soon as it is convenient.
240
０５／０７／２８１３：５５：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４４
Transmission Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick and check 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
the fluid level. It should be into the transmission securely as
between the upper and lower shown in the illustration.
marks.
Make sure the notch fits in the
5. If the level is below the lower dipstick guide and the dipstick is
mark, add fluid into the dipstick down all the way.
hole to bring it to the upper mark.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully contact your dealer.
so you do not spill any. Clean up
UPPER MARK
any spill immediately; it could
LOWER MARK
compartment.
Maintenance
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into Always use Honda ATF-Z1
the transmission securely as (automatic transmission fluid). If
shown in the illustration. it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
Make sure the notch in the rubber transmission fluid as a temporary
cap fits in the dipstick guide and replacement. However, continued
that you push the dipstick in all use can affect the shift quality.
the way. Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
241
０５／０７／２８１３：５５：５７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４５
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission The fluid level should be up to the Manual Transmission

On 4-cylinder models edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add On EX-V6 model
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Check the fluid level with the
FILLER BOLT (MTF) until it starts to run out of the transmission at normal operating
hole. Reinstall the filler bolt, and temperature and the vehicle sitting
tighten it securely. on level ground.
If Honda MTF is not available, you CHECK BOLT

may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API WASHER
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
Correct level motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
Check the fluid level with the cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
transmission at normal operating soon as it is convenient.
temperature and the vehicle DRAIN BOLT
sitting on level ground. Remove If you are not sure how to check and
the transmission filler bolt, and add fluid, contact your dealer. Remove the check bolt and look for
carefully feel inside the bolt hole transmission fluid coming out of the
with your finger. bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
the check bolt.
242
０５／０７／２８１３：５６：１０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４６
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Pour the fluid into the filler hole Brake and Clutch Fluid
FILLER BOLT
slowly and carefully so you do not Check the fluid level in the
spill. Clean up any spill immediately; reservoirs monthly. There are up to
it could damage components in the two reservoirs, depending on the
engine compartment. model. They are:
If Honda MTF is not available, you Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API Clutch fluid reservoir
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR (manual transmission only)
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
WASHER temporary replacement. However, Check the brake fluid level in the
motor oil does not contain the proper reservoir monthly.
If no fluid comes out, remove the additives, and continued use can Replace the brake fluid according to
Maintenance
filler bolt. Slowly add Honda Manual cause stiffer shifting. Replace as the time recommendation in the
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it soon as it is convenient. maintenance minder schedule.
starts to run out of the check bolt
hole. Let the fluid run out until it If you are not sure how to check and
stops, then reinstall the check bolt add fluid, contact your dealer.
and the filler bolt.
CONTINUED
243
０５／０７／２８１３：５６：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４７
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake System Clutch System

Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not Manual Transmission only
available, you should use only DOT 3 MAX
MAX
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can

cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible. MIN
MIN
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not The fluid level should be between
compatible with your vehicle’s the MIN and MAX marks on the side The fluid level should be between
braking system and can cause of the reservoir. If the level is at or the MIN and MAX marks on the side
extensive damage. below the MIN mark, your brake of the reservoir. If it is not, add
system needs attention. Have the brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
brake system inspected for leaks or Use the same fluid specified for the
worn brake pads. brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak

in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
244
０５／０７／２８１３：５６：３０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４８
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL UPPER LEVEL Always use Honda Power Steering

Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can

indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL 6-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL possible.
Check the level on the side of the Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
Maintenance
reservoir when the engine is cold. you do not spill any. Clean up any
The fluid should be between the spill immediately; it could damage Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. components in the engine or right lock and holding it there can
If not, add power steering fluid to the compartment. damage the power steering pump.
UPPER LEVEL mark.
245
０５／０７／２８１３：５６：４４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２４９
Timing Belt, Lights
Timing Belt Headlight Aiming High Beam Headlight

6-cylinder models only The headlights were properly aimed
The timing belt should be replaced when your vehicle was new. If you FASTENERS AIR INTAKE
COVER
at the intervals shown in the regularly carry heavy items in the
maintenance minder schedule. trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.) should be done by your dealer or
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you other qualified mechanic.
regularly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions: Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
In very high temperatures bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
(over 110°F, 43°C). it by its base, and protect the glass 4-cylinder models
from contact with your skin or hard
In very low temperatures objects. If you touch the glass, clean 1. Open the hood. To change a bulb
(under −20°F, −29°C). it with denatured alcohol and a clean on the driver’s side, undo the two
cloth. fasteners and remove the air
If you frequently tow a trailer. intake cover.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot

when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
246
０５／０７／２８１３：５６：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５０
Lights
AIR INTAKE
COVER
FASTENERS
BULB
TAB BULB TAB
6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Maintenance
2. Remove the electrical connector 5. Push the electrical connector back
from the bulb by squeezing the onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
connector to unlock the tab, then all the way.
slide the connector off the bulb.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
3. Remove the bulb by turning it new bulb.
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise. 7. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the air intake cover.
4. Install the new bulb, and turn it Reinstall the two fasteners and
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock secure them by pushing on the
it in place. heads until they lock.
247
０５／０７／２８１３：５７：０７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５１
Lights
Low Beam Headlight 3. Pull the inner fender cover away

from the fender and bumper.
HOLDING CLIPS
AIR INTAKE DUCT
EX-V6 with M/T

1. To change the passenger’s side 5. Remove the electrical connector
bulb, start the engine, turn the 4. On EX-V6 model with manual from the bulb by squeezing the
steering wheel all the way to the transmission connector to unlock the tab, then
left, and turn off the engine. To To change the low beam headlight slide the connector off the bulb.
change the driver’s side bulb, turn bulb on the driver’s side, remove
the steering wheel to the right. the air intake duct. You can reach 6. Remove the bulb by turning it
the air intake duct from the back approximately one-quarter turn
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to side of the inner fender. counterclockwise.
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
248
０５／０７／２８１３：５７：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５２
Lights
7. Install the new bulb, and turn it Replacing a Front Side Marker/
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb
it in place.
HOLDING CLIPS
8. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
9. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
10. On EX-V6 model with manual

transmission
(Driver’s side) 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
Maintenance
Reinstall the air intake duct from the fender and bumper.
securely. 1. To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the 4. Remove the socket from the
11. Put the inner fender cover in place. steering wheel all the way to the headlight assembly by turning it
Install and lock each holding clip left, and turn off the engine. To one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
by pushing on the center. change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
CONTINUED
249
０５／０７／２８１３：５７：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５３
Lights
5. Remove the burned out bulb from Replacing Rear Bulbs 2. Determine which bulb is burned
the socket by pushing it in and out: turn signal or back-up light.
turning the bulb counterclockwise
until it unlocks. 3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
6. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place. 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
7. Insert the socket back into the into the socket until it bottoms.
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
8. Turn on the lights to make sure COVER until it locks.
the new bulb is working.
1. Open the trunk. 6. Turn on the lights to make sure
9. Put the inner fender cover in place. the new bulb is working.
Install and lock each holding clip Remove the light assembly cover
by pushing on the center. by pulling its outside edge. 7. Install the light assembly cover.
Make sure it snaps into place.
250
０５／０７／２８１３：５７：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５４
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Floor Mats
belt anchors can cause the belts to
LOOP retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The driver’s and the right-rear
brush with a mixture of mild soap passenger’s floor mats that came
and warm water to clean them. Do with your vehicle hook over the floor
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning mat anchors. This keeps the floor
solvents. Let the belts air dry before mat from sliding forward and
you use the vehicle. possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
CONTINUED
251
０５／０７／２８１３：５７：５５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５５
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
If you remove the floor mats, make Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades
sure to re-anchor them when you put This filter removes the dust and Check the condition of the wiper
them back in your vehicle. pollen that is brought in from the blades at least every 6 months.
outside through the heating and Replace them if you find signs of
If you use non-Honda floor mats, cooling system/climate control cracking in the rubber, areas that are
make sure they fit properly and that system. getting hard, or if they leave streaks
they can be used with the floor mat and unwiped areas when used.
anchors. Do not put additional floor Have your dealer replace the filter
mats on top of an anchored mat. when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
Make sure the right-rear floor mat is information display. It should be
properly hooked to the floor mat replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
anchor. Your vehicle is equipped km) if you drive primarily in urban
with front passenger’s seat weight areas that have high concentrations
sensors. If the right-rear passenger’s of soot in the air from industry and
floor mat is on the seat rail of the diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
front passenger’s seat, the sensors more often if airflow from the
will detect the decreased weight on heating and cooling system/climate
the seat and they may not work control system becomes less than
properly. usual. Have the dust and pollen filter
replaced by your dealer.
252
０５／０７／２８１３：５８：０４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５６
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB BLADE
To replace a wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly 3. Remove the blade from its holder
Maintenance
from the wiper arm by pushing in by grasping the tabbed end of the
1. Raise the wiper arm off the the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
windshield. Raise the driver’s side while you push the blade assembly come out of the holder.
first, then the passenger’s side. toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
CONTINUED
253
０５／０７／２８１３：５８：１３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５７
Wiper Blades, Tires
BLADE
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the Tires
holder until the tabs lock. To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly size, in good condition with adequate
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it tread, and correctly inflated.
locks in place.
The following pages give more
7. Lower the wiper arm down against detailed information on how to take
the windshield, the passenger’s care of your tires and what to do
side first, then the driver’s side. when they need to be replaced.
REINFORCEMENT
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If Using tires that are excessively
they have no plastic or metal worn or improperly inflated can
reinforcement along the back cause a crash in which you can
edge, remove the metal be seriously hurt or killed.
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in Follow all instructions in this
the slots along the edge of the new owner’s manual regarding tire
blade. inflation and maintenance.
254
０５／０７／２８１３：５８：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５８
Tires
Inflation Guidelines Use a gauge to measure the air If you check air pressure when the
Keeping the tires properly inflated pressure in each tire at least once a tires are hot [driven for several miles
provides the best combination of month. Even tires that are in good (kilometers)], you will see readings 4
handling, tread life, and riding condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
comfort. 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
month. Remember to check the readings. This is normal. Do not let
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, spare tire at the same time. air out to match the recommended
adversely affect handling and fuel cold air pressure. The tire will be
economy, and are more likely to Check the air pressures when the underinflated.
fail from being overheated. tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 You should use your own tire
Overinflated tires can make your hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 pressure gauge whenever you check
vehicle ride more harshly, are km). Add or release air, if needed, to your tire pressures. This will make it
more prone to damage from road match the recommended cold tire easier for you to tell if a pressure
Maintenance
hazards, and wear unevenly. pressures on page 256 . loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you While tubeless tires have some
think a tire might be low, check it ability to self-seal if they are
immediately with a tire gauge. punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
255
０５／０７／２８１３：５８：４２３１ＳＤＰ６３００２５９
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures Canadian 4-cylinder LX models For convenience, the recommended
The following chart shows the Tire Size/Type Cold Tire Pressure tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
recommended cold tire pressures for Front: on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
most normal and high-speed driving 30 psi (210 kPa ,
conditions. P205/65R15 92H 2.1 kgf/cm ) For additional information about
Rear: your tires, see page 296 .
All 4-cylinder models except Canadian 29 psi (200 kPa ,
LX 2.0 kgf/cm ) Tire Inspection
Tire Size/Type Cold Tire Pressure Compact Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , Every time you check inflation, you
Front: 4.2 kgf/cm ) should also examine the tires for
32 psi (220 kPa , damage, foreign objects, and wear.
P205/60R16 91V 2.2 kgf/cm ) 6-cylinder models
Rear: Tire Size/Type Cold Tire Pressure You should look for:
30 psi (210 kPa , Front: Bumps or bulges in the tread or
2.1 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , side of the tire. Replace the tire if
Compact Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , P215/50R17 93V 2.2 kgf/cm ) you find either of these conditions.
4.2 kgf/cm ) Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa , Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
2.0 kgf/cm ) of the tire. Replace the tire if you
Compact Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , can see fabric or cord.
4.2 kgf/cm )
Excessive tread wear.
256
０５／０７／２８１３：５９：０３３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６０
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if

you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires
(For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
Your tires have wear indicators balanced. This increases riding
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
tread wears down, you will see a have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across balance. the tires according to the
the tread. This shows there is less maintenance messages displayed on
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left the information display. Move the
on the tire. tires to the positions shown in the
For vehicles with aluminum wheels: chart each time they are rotated. If
A tire this worn gives very little Improper wheel weights can damage you purchase directional tires, rotate
traction on wet roads. You should your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use only front-to-back.
replace the tire if you can see three only Honda wheel weights f or
or more tread wear indicators. balancing.
257
０５／０７／２８１３：５９：１８３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６１
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels It is best to replace all four tires at Wheel and Tire Specifications
Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible Wheels:
the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front All 4-cylinder models except Canadian
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair. LX
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously 16 x 6 1/2 JJ
tire’s sidewall). affect your vehicle’s handling. Canadian 4-cylinder LX models
15 x 6 1/2 JJ
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on If you ever replace a wheel, make 6-cylinder models
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheel’s specifications 17 x 6 1/2 JJ
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels.
accuracy. Using tires of a different Tires:
size or construction can cause the Replacement wheels are available at All models except Canadian 4-cylinder
ABS and vehicle stability assist your dealer. LX
system (VSA) to work inconsistently. P205/60R16 91V
Canadian 4-cylinder LX models
The ABS works by comparing the P205/65R15 92H
speed of the wheels. When replacing Installing improper tires on your 6-cylinder models
tires, use the same size originally vehicle can affect handling and P215/50R17 93V
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size stability. This can cause a crash
and construction can affect wheel in which you can be seriously See page 294 for information about
speed and may cause the system to hurt or killed. DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
activate. 296 for tire size and labeling
Always use the size and type of information.
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
258
０５／０７／２８１３：５９：３０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６２
Tires
Winter Driving Tire Chains These chains are the only ones that
Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Mount tire chains on your tires when have been approved by Honda for
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or use on your vehicle. Since Honda
weather tread design suitable for local laws. Install them only on the cannot test all chains, you must be
most winter driving conditions. front tires. personally responsible for proper
selection, installation, and use of tire
For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire chains.
or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly
snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed The chains listed here are available
be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain at many auto supply stores. For a
certain conditions. Company (SCC). complete list of stores, visit the SCC
website at www.scc-chain.com.
Snow Tires LX When installing chains, follow the
If you mount snow tires on your Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134 manufacturer’s instructions, and
Maintenance
vehicle, make sure they are radial mount them as tightly as you can.
tires of the same size and load range EX and EX-L Drive slowly with chains installed.
as original tires. Mount snow tires on Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
all four wheels. The traction CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires. LX-V6 and EX-V6
Check with the tire dealer for Cable-types: CH2412T
maximum speed recommendations.
CONTINUED
259
０５／０７／２８１３：５９：４１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６３
Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this

owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.

If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop Check the condition of the battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a
and investigate. If the chains have monthly by looking at the test white or yellowish powder). To
loosened, retighten them. Make sure indicator window. The label on the remove it, cover the terminals with a
they do not contact the brake lines battery explains the test indicator’s solution of baking soda and water. It
or suspension. colors. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
Remove the chains as soon as you water. Dry off the battery with a
begin driving on cleared roads. cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
260
０５／０７／２８１３：５９：４７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６４
Checking the Battery
If additional battery maintenance is If you need to connect the battery to

needed, see your dealer or a a charger, disconnect both cables to
qualified technician. prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
WARNING: Battery posts, the negative (−) cable first, and
terminals, and related accessories reconnect it last.
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The battery gives off explosive

hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
Maintenance
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a

face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
261
０５／０７／２８１４：００：００３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６５
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Leave the parking brake off. Put To minimize sticking, apply a
an extended period (more than 1 the transmission in reverse silicone spray lubricant to all door
month), there are several things you (manual) or Park (automatic). and trunk seals. Also, apply a
should do to prepare it for storage. vehicle body wax to the painted
Proper preparation helps prevent Block the rear wheels. surfaces that mate with the door
deterioration and makes it easier to and trunk seals.
get your vehicle back on the road. If If the vehicle is to be stored for a
possible, store your vehicle indoors. longer period, it should be Cover the vehicle with a
supported on jackstands so the ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
Fill the fuel tank. tires are off the ground. from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Change the engine oil and filter. Leave one window open slightly (if as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
the vehicle is being stored which can damage the paint.
Wash and dry the exterior indoors).
completely. If possible, periodically run the
Disconnect the battery. engine until it reaches full
Clean the interior. Make sure the operating temperature (the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are Support the front wiper blade cooling fan cycles on and off
completely dry. arms with a folded towel or rag so twice). Preferably, do this once a
they do not touch the windshield. month.
262
０５／０７／２８１４：００：０５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６６
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 264

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 265
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 270
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 272
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 274
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 276
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 276
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 277
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 278
on getting your vehicle towed. Closing the Moonroof ................... 279
Fuses ............................................... 280
Fuse Locations ............................... 283
Emergency Towing ....................... 285

263
０５／０７／２８１４：００：１９３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６７
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Follow these precautions: INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced, Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can. This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
Check the inflation pressure of the faces. Use greater caution while
compact spare tire every time you driving.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to: Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer. Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
Do not use your compact spare replacement should be the same size
tire on another vehicle unless it is and design tire, mounted on the
the same make and model. same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
On all V6 models wheel, and the spare wheel is not
Turn off the VSA system (see designed for mounting a regular tire.
pages 211 and 212 ). Driving with
the compact spare tire may
activate the VSA.
264
０５／０７／２８１４：００：３１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６８
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TRUNK FLOOR 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
stop in a safe place to change it. and turn the ignition switch to the
Drive slowly along the shoulder until LOCK (0) position. Have all
you get to an exit or an area that is passengers get out of the vehicle
far away from the traffic lanes. while you change the tire.
3. The tools are in the trunk. Open

the trunk and raise the trunk floor
The vehicle can easily roll off by lifting up on the back edge.
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath. 4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
TOOL KIT SPARE TIRE JACK
Follow the directions for 5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and the spare tire out of its well.
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park (A/T) or

jack. Reverse (M/T). Apply the parking
brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
CONTINUED
265
０５／０７／２８１４：００：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２６９
WHEEL NUT
JACK WHEEL NUT WRENCH
6. The jack is behind a cover in the 7. Turn the jack’s end bracket 8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
right fender. Remove the cover by counterclockwise to loosen it, then with the wheel nut wrench.
turning the handle counterclock- remove the jack.
wise, then pulling on the cover.
266
０５／０７／２８１４：００：５１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７０
WHEEL COVER
WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION WHEEL NUTS

JACKING POINT
9. Place the jack under the jacking 10.Use the extension and the wheel On Canadian 4-cylinder LX model
point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
change. Turn the end bracket vehicle until the flat tire is off the wheel cover off with a screwdriver or

clockwise until the top of the jack ground. other tool. The wheel cover cannot
contacts the jacking point. Make be removed without first removing
sure the jacking point tab is 11. Remove the wheel nuts, then the wheel nuts.
resting in the jack notch. remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
CONTINUED
267
０５／０７／２８１４：００：５９３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７１
BRAKE HUB
12. Before mounting the spare tire, 13.Put on the spare tire. Put the 14.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
wipe any dirt off the mounting wheel nuts back on finger-tight, and remove the jack.
surface of the wheel and hub with then tighten them in a crisscross
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub pattern with the wheel nut wrench
carefully; it may be hot from until the wheel is firmly against
driving. the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
268
０５／０７／２８１４：０１：１０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７２
WING BOLT
For For
spare normal
tire tire
SPACER CONE
15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 16. All models except Canadian 4-cylinder 17.Place the flat tire face down in the
the same crisscross pattern. Have LX spare tire well.
the wheel nut torque checked at Remove the center cap before

the nearest automotive service storing the flat tire in the trunk 18.Remove the spacer cone from the
facility. well. wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m) 19. Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
CONTINUED
269
０５／０７／２８１４：０１：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７３
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
20. Store the jack in its holder. Turn If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in Diagnosing why the engine won’t Motor Operates Very Slowly
place. Replace the cover. Store the start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
tools. on what you hear when you turn the the START (III) position, you do not
ignition switch to the START (III) hear the normal noise of the engine
position: trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound or series of clicks, or
Loose items can fly around the You hear nothing, or almost nothing at all.
interior in a crash and could nothing. The engine’s starter Check these things:
seriously injure the occupants. motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools If you have a manual transmission,
securely before driving. You can hear the starter motor the clutch pedal must be pushed
operating normally, or the starter all the way to the floor or the
motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate. With an
21. Store the wheel cover or center faster than normal, but the engine automatic transmission, it must be
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does does not start up and run. in Park or neutral.
not get scratched or damaged.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
22. Lower the trunk floor, then close (II) position. Turn on the
the trunk lid. headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 272 .
270
０５／０７／２８１４：０１：３５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７４
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the The Starter Operates Normally If you find nothing wrong, you will
START (III) position. If the In this case, the starter motor’s need a qualified technician to find
headlights do not dim, check the speed sounds normal, or even faster the problem. See Emergency
condition of the fuses. If the fuses than normal, when you turn the Towing on page 285 .
are OK, there is probably ignition switch to the START (III)
something wrong with the position, but the engine does not run.
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will Are you using the proper starting
need a qualified technician to procedure? Refer to Starting the
determine the problem (see Engine on page 199 .
Emergency Towing on page 285 ).
Are you using a properly coded
If the headlights dim noticeably or key? An improperly coded key will
go out when you try to start the cause the immobilizer system
engine, either the battery is indicator in the instrument panel
discharged or the connections are to blink rapidly (see page 59 ).

corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
(see page 260 ). You can then try gauge; the low fuel indicator may
jump starting the vehicle from a not be working.
booster battery (see page 272 ).
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 280 ).
271
０５／０７／２８１４：０１：４７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７５
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
A battery can explode if you do seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not follow the correct procedure, jump starting until it thaws.
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
BOOSTER
Keep all sparks, open flames, If a battery sits in extreme cold, the BATTERY
4-cylinder models
and smoking materials away electrolyte inside can f reeze.
from the battery. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen The numbers in the illustrations
battery can cause it to rupture. show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
You cannot start your vehicle with an 2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
automatic transmission by pushing sories: heater, A/C, climate
or pulling it. control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake.
272
０５／０７／２８１４：０１：５９３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７６
Jump Starting
BOOSTER
6-cylinder models BATTERY
3. Connect one jumper cable to the 4. Connect the second jumper cable 6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
positive (＋) terminal on your to the negative (−) terminal on motor still operates slowly, check
vehicle’s battery. Connect the the booster battery. Connect the that the jumper cables have good

other end to the positive (＋) other end to the grounding strap metal-to-metal contact.
terminal on the booster battery. as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
CONTINUED
273
０５／０７／２８１４：０２：０９３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７７
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
7. Once the vehicle is running, If the Engine Overheats

disconnect the negative cable from The pointer of your vehicle’s
your vehicle, then from the temperature gauge should stay in Steam and spray from an
booster battery. Disconnect the the midrange under most conditions. overheated engine can
positive cable from your vehicle, If it climbs to the red mark, you seriously scald you.
and then from the booster battery. should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). Do not open the hood if steam
Keep the ends of the jumper is coming out.
cables away from each other and If your vehicle overheats, you should
any metal on the vehicle until take immediate action. The only
everything is disconnected. indication may be the temperature 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Otherwise, you may cause an gauge climbing to or above the red Put the transmission in neutral
electrical short. mark. Or you may see steam or (M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
spray coming from under the hood. parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
Driving with the temperature gauge 2. If you see steam and/or spray
pointer at the red mark can cause coming from under the hood, turn
serious damage to the engine. off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
274
０５／０７／２８１４：０２：２２３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７８
If the Engine Overheats
3. If you do not see steam or spray, 7. If there was no coolant in the 9. Start the engine, and set the
leave the engine running, and reserve tank, you may need to add temperature to maximum heat
watch the temperature gauge. If coolant to the radiator. Let the (climate control to AUTO at
the high heat is due to overloading, engine cool down until the pointer ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
the engine should start to cool reaches the middle of the radiator up to the base of the filler
down almost immediately. If it temperature gauge or lower neck. If you do not have the
does, wait until the temperature before checking the radiator. proper coolant mixture available,
gauge comes down to the midpoint, you can add plain water.
then continue driving. Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
4. If the temperature gauge stays at Removing the radiator cap the proper mixture as soon as you
the red mark, turn off the engine. while the engine is hot can can.
cause the coolant to spray out,
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, seriously scalding you. 10.Put the radiator cap back on
such as a split radiator hose. tightly. Run the engine, and watch
Everything is still extremely hot, Always let the engine and the temperature gauge. If it goes

so use caution. If you find a leak, it radiator cool down before back to the red mark, the engine
must be repaired before you removing the radiator cap. needs repair (see Emergency
continue driving (see Emergency Towing on page 285 ).
Towing on page 285 ). 8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap 11.If the temperature stays normal,
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, counterclockwise, without pushing check the coolant level in the
check the coolant level in the down, to the first stop. After the radiator reserve tank. If it has
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant pressure releases, push down on gone down, add coolant to the
if the level is below the MIN mark. the cap, and turn it until it comes MAX mark. Put the cap back on
off. tightly.
275
０５／０７／２８１４：０２：３４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２７９
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure 1. Safely pull off the road and shut Charging System
Indicator off the engine. Turn on the hazard Indicator
This indicator should never come on warning lights. If the charging system indicator
when the engine is running. If it comes on brightly when the engine
starts flashing or stays on, the oil 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. is running, the battery is not being
pressure has dropped very low or Open the hood, and check the oil charged.
lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 188 ). An engine
damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving accessories. Try not to use other
maneuvers. electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil level back to the full mark on the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical dipstick (see page 232 ).
damage almost immediately. Turn of f Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. pressure indicator. If it does not go assistance.
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
285 ).
276
０５／０７／２８１４：０２：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８０
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If your vehicle battery has been
while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you disconnected or gone dead, these
of the engine’s emissions control continue driving, have the vehicle codes are erased. It takes at least
systems may have a problem. Even checked by the dealer as soon as three days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in possible. conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause To check if they are set, turn the
increased emissions. Continued ignition switch to the ON (II)
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the position without starting the engine.
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can The malfunction indicator lamp will
If you have recently refueled your damage your vehicle’s emissions come on for 20 seconds. If it then
vehicle, the indicator coming on controls and the engine. Those repairs goes off, the readiness codes are set.
could be due to a loose or missing may not be covered by your vehicle’s If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
fuel fill cap. You will also see a warranties. codes are not set. If possible, do not
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on take your vehicle for a state
the information display. Tighten the This indicator may also come on with emissions test until the readiness

cap until it clicks at least once (see the ‘‘D’’ indicator. codes are set. Refer to State
page 186 ). Tightening the cap will Emissions Testing for more
not turn the indicator off Readiness Codes information (see page 300 ).
immediately; it takes several days Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
of normal driving. codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
277
０５／０７／２８１４：０２：５５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８１
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not If you must drive the vehicle a short
feel normal, you should take distance in this condition, drive
immediate action. A problem in one slowly and carefully.
The brake system indicator normally part of the system’s dual circuit
comes on when you turn the ignition design will still give you braking at If the ABS indicator and the VSA
switch to the ON (II) position and as two wheels. You will feel the brake system indicator come on with the
a reminder to check the parking pedal go down much farther before brake system indicator, have your
brake. It will stay on if you do not the vehicle begins to slow down, and vehicle inspected by your dealer
fully release the parking brake. you will have to press harder on the immediately.
pedal.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level Slow down by shifting to a lower
is probably low. Press lightly on the gear, and pull to the side of the road
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. when it is safe. Because of the long
If it does, check the brake fluid level distance needed to stop, it is
the next time you stop at a service hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
station (see page 244 ). should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
If the fluid level is low, take your Towing on page 285 ).
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
278
０５／０７／２８１４：０３：０６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８２
Closing the Moonroof
If equipped NOTCH SOCKET

If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following: TAB
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof

motor (see page284 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the

new fuse blows immediately or the MOONROOF WRENCH
moonroof motor still does not ROUND PLUG
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually. 4. To remove the round plug in the 5. Insert the moonroof wrench into
center of the headliner, turn the the socket behind the plug. Turn
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of plug by using a screwdriver or the wrench until the moonroof is

the tool kit in the trunk. coin, then pry it out. Make sure to fully closed.
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceiling as 6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
shown in the illustration. round plug.
If you need to close the moonroof

manually, it means the moonroof
opening/closing function is
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
279
０５／０７／２８１４：０３：１６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８３
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD Checking and Replacing Fuses

NOTCH If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
TAB Determine from the chart on pages
283 and 284 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in The under-hood fuse box is on the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the
two fuse boxes. driver’s side. To open it, push the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
tabs as shown. headlights and all other
The interior fuse box is on the accessories are off.
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in 2. Remove the cover from the fuse
the notch on the lid, and pull it box.
upward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
280
０５／０７／２８１４：０３：２６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８４
Fuses
FUSE BLOWN BLOWN FUSE PULLER
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
looking through the side window fuses in the interior fuse box by

at the wire inside. Removing these pulling out each one with the fuse
fuses requires a Phillips-head puller provided in the under-hood
screwdriver. fuse box.
CONTINUED
281
０５／０７／２８１４：０３：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８５
Fuses
FUSE If you cannot drive the vehicle 6. If the replacement fuse of the
BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you same rating blows in a short time,
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse there is probably a serious
of the same rating or a lower rating electrical problem with your
from one of the other circuits. Make vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
sure you can do without that circuit that circuit, and have your vehicle
temporarily (such as the accessory checked by a qualified mechanic.
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a If the driver’s power window fuse is
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it removed, the AUTO function of the
might blow out again. This does not driver’s window will be disabled. To
indicate anything wrong. Replace the reset the AUTO function, see page
fuse with one of the correct rating as 92 .
5. Look for a blown wire inside the soon as you can.
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with If the radio fuse is removed, the
one of the spare fuses of the same audio system will disable itself.
rating or lower. The next time you turn on the
Replacing a f use with one that has a radio you will see ‘‘CODE/COdE’’
higher rating greatly increases the in the frequency display. Use the
chances of damaging the electrical preset bars to enter the code (see
system. If you do not have a page 172 ).
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
282
０５／０７／２８１４：０３：４６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８６
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
11 20 A Cooling Fan＊2
30 A Cooling Fan＊3
12 7.5 A MG. Clutch
13 20 A Horn, Stop
14 40 A Rear Defroster
15 40 A Back Up, ACC
16 15 A Hazard
17 30 A ABS Motor＊2
30 A VSA Motor＊3
18 20 A ABS Unit＊2
40 A VSA Unit＊3
19 40 A Option
20 40 A Option＊1

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 21 40 A Heater Motor
22 100 A Battery
1 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam 6 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam − Not Used
2 30 A Rear Defroster Coil＊1 7 7.5 A Back Up 23 50 A ＋B IG1 Main
3 10 A Left Headlight High Beam 8 15 A FI ECU (ECM/PCM) 50 A Power Window Main
4 15 A Small Light 9 20 A Condenser Fan
5 10 A Right Headlight High Beam 10 − Not Used ＊1: All except U.S. 4-cylinder LX model
＊2: 4-cylinder models
＊3: 6-cylinder models
CONTINUED
283
０５／０７／２８１４：０３：５７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８７
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
14 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Sliding＊

15 20 A Heated Seats＊
16 20 A Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining＊
17 − Not Used
18 15 A ACG
19 15 A Fuel Pump
20 7.5 A Washer
21 7.5 A Meter
22 10 A SRS
23 7.5 A IGP
24 − Not Used
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 25 − Not Used
26 20 A Passenger’s Power Window
1 15 A DBW 8 20 A Door Lock 27 20 A Driver’s Power Window
2 15 A Ignition Coil 9 15 A Front Accessory Sockets 28 20 A Moonroof ＊
3 10 A Daytime Running Light 10 7.5 A OPDS (Occupant Position 29 − Not Used
4 15 A Laf Heater Detection System) 30 7.5 A A/C
5 10 A Radio 11 30 A IG Wiper 31 − Not Used
6 7.5 A Interior Light 12 − Not Used 32 7.5 A ACC
7 10 A Back Up 13 − Not Used 33 − Not Used
＊ : All except 4-cylinder LX model
284
０５／０７／２８１４：０４：１５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８８
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
dangerous. Manual Transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot
Release the parking brake. shif t the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your Shift the transmission to neutral. engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle: Leave the ignition switch in the vehicle must be transported with the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the f ront wheels of f the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator steering wheel does not lock.
loads your vehicle on the back of a With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to trans- Automatic Transmission: do not tow the vehicle more than 50
port your vehicle. Release the parking brake. miles (80 km), and keep the speed
Start the engine. below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow Shift to D, then to N.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go Turn off the engine. If your vehicle is equipped with a

under the tires (front) and lift them Leave the ignition switch in the front spoiler, remove it before
off the ground. The other two tires ACCESSORY (I) position so the towing so it is not damaged.
remain on the ground. This is an steering wheel does not lock.
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
CONTINUED
285
０５／０７／２８１４：０４：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２８９
Emergency Towing
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the The steering system can be damaged if
bumpers will cause serious damage. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
The bumpers are not designed to ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
support the vehicle’s weight. position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
286
０５／０７／２８１４：０４：２５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９０
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 288 Emissions Controls........................ 297
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications The Clean Air Act ...................... 297
your vehicle, and the locations of the (4-cylinder Models) ................... 290 Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also Specifications System..................................... 297
includes information you should (6-cylinder Models) ................... 292 Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and DOT Tire Quality Grading System..................................... 297
emissions control systems. (U. S. Vehicles) ...................... 294 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Uniform Tire Quality Recovery ................................. 297
Grading ................................... 294 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 298
Treadwear .................................. 294 PGM-FI System ..................... 298
Traction....................................... 294 Ignition Timing Control
Temperature .............................. 295 System................................. 298
Tire Labeling .................................. 296 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 298
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 298
Replacement Parts..................... 298
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 299
State Emissions Testing ............... 300
287
０５／０７／２８１４：０４：３１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９１
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
288
０５／０７／２８１４：０４：３７３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９２
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into 4-cylinder Models

the engine block. It is on the front. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission. ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
289
０５／０７／２８１４：０４：５６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９３
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
Dimensions Capacities
Length 187.8 in (4,770 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 71.3 in (1,810 mm) 17.09 US gal (64.7 )
＊1
Height 55.7 in (1,415 mm) Engine Change
Wheelbase 105.1 in (2,670 mm) coolant Manual 1.35 US gal (5.1 )
Track Front 61.1 in (1,553 mm) Automatic 1.32 US gal (5.0 )
Rear 61.2 in (1,554 mm) Total
Manual 1.90 US gal (7.2 )
Weights Automatic 1.88 US gal (7.1 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Engine oil Change＊2
to the driver’s doorjamb. Including 4.4 US qt (4.2 )
filter
Air Conditioning Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) filter
Charge quantity 17.6−19.4 oz (500−550 g) Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 )
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Manual trans- Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
mission fluid Total 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
transmission Total 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
fluid
Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
reservoir
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
290
０５／０７／２８１４：０５：２４３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９４
Lights Engine
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Type Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC i-VTEC
Low 12 V − 51 W (HB4) 4-cylinder gasoline engine
Front turn signal/parking/side 12 V − 24/2.2 CP Bore x Stroke 3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
marker lights Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W Compression ratio 9.7 : 1
Back-up lights 12 V − 18 W Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K11 ＊1
License plate lights 12 V − 3 CP IZFR6K13 ＊2
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W DENSO: SKJ20DRM11 ＊1
Trunk light 12 V − 5W SKJ20DRM13 ＊2
Door courtesy lights 12 V − 2 CP
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 1.1 W Alignment
Spotlights 12 V − 8W Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Battery Camber Front 0°
Capacity 12 V − 38 AH/5 HR Rear −1°
12 V − 47 AH/20 HR Caster Front 3°15’
Fuses Tires
Interior See page 284 or the fuse label Size Front/Rear P205/60R16 91V ＊3
attached to the inside of the fuse P205/65R15 92H ＊4
box lid. Spare T135/90D15 100M
Under-hood See page 283 or the fuse box Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )＊3
cover. 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )＊4
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )＊3
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )＊4
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
＊1 : All models except Californian models with automatic transmission
＊2 : Californian models with automatic transmission
＊3 : All models except Canadian LX
＊4 : Canadian LX models
291
０５／０７／２８１４：０５：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９５
Dimensions Capacities
Length 187.8 in (4,770 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 71.3 in (1,810 mm) 17.09 US gal (64.7 )
＊1
Height 55.8 in (1,418 mm) Engine Change
Wheelbase 105.1 in (2,670 mm) coolant Manual 1.74 US gal (6.6 )
Track Front 61.1 in (1,553 mm) Automatic 1.77 US gal (6.7 )
Rear 61.2 in (1,554 mm) Total
Manual 2.17 US gal (8.2 )
Weights Automatic 2.22 US gal (8.4 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Engine oil Change＊2
to the driver’s doorjamb. Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
filter
Air Conditioning Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) filter
Charge quantity 17.6−19.4 oz (500−550 g) Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Manual Change 2.3 US qt (2.2 )
fluid
Automatic Change 3.1 US qt (2.9 )
fluid
Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
reservoir
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
292
０５／０７／２８１４：０６：０５３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９６
Lights Engine
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Type Water cooled 4-stroke
Low 12 V − 51 W (HB4) SOHC VTEC
Front turn signal/parking/side 12 V − 24/2.2 CP 6-cylinder gasoline engine
marker lights Bore x Stroke 3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W Displacement 183 cu-in (2,997 cm )
Back-up lights 12 V − 18 W Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
License plate lights 12 V − 3 CP Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K11
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W DENSO: SKJ20DRM11
Trunk light 12 V − 5W
Door courtesy lights 12 V − 2 CP Alignment
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 1.1 W Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Spotlights 12 V − 8W Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Camber Front 0°
Battery Rear −1°
Capacity 12 V − 52 AH/5 HR Caster Front 3°15’
12 V − 65 AH/20 HR
Tires
Fuses Size Front/Rear P215/50R17 93V
Interior See page 284 or the fuse label Spare T135/90D15 100M ＊1
attached to the inside of the fuse T135/80R16 101M ＊2
box lid. Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Under-hood See page 283 or the fuse box Rear 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
cover. Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
＊1 : LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmission

＊2 : EX-V6 with manual transmission
293
０５／０７／２８１４：０６：１６３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９７
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
294
０５／０７／２８１４：０６：２１３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９８
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
295
０５／０７／２８１４：０６：４０３１ＳＤＰ６３００２９９
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle 16 − Rim diameter in inches. 2202 − Date of manufacture.
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described 91 − Load index (a numerical code Maximum Tire Pressure
below. associated with the maximum Max Press − The maximum air
load the tire can carry). pressure the tire can
Tire Size hold.
Whenever tires are replaced, they V − Speed symbol (an
should be replaced with tires of the alphabetical code indicating Maximum Tire Load
same size. Following is an example the maximum speed rating). Max Load − The maximum load
of tire size with an explanation of the tire can carry at
what each component means. Tire Identification Number maximum air
The tire identification number (TIN) pressure.
P205/60R16 91V is a group of numbers and letters
that look like this example:
P − Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle). DOT B97R FW6X 2202
205 − Tire width in millimeters. DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section the U.S. Department of
height as a percentage of its Transportation.
width).
B97R − Manufacturer’s
R − Tire construction code (R identification mark.
indicates radial).
FW6X − Tire type code.
296
０５／０７／２８１４：０６：５１３１ＳＤＰ６３００３００
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
Controlling the production of NOx, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
CO, and HC is important to the the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
environment. Under certain canister while the engine is off. After
＊
conditions of sunlight and climate, In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
NOx and HC react to form with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
monoxide does not contribute to agreement with Environment
smog creation, but it is a poisonous Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
gas. manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
297
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：０４３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０１
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls then controls how much fuel to inject Replacement Parts
The exhaust emissions controls under all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas Ignition Timing Control System gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic This system constantly adjusts the levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work ignition timing, reducing the amount Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s of HC, CO, and NOx produced. remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) equivalent for repairs. Using lower
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust System quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and system takes some of the exhaust
evaporative emissions control gas and routes it back into the intake The emissions control systems are
systems. manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the covered by warranties separate from
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System of NOx produced when the fuel is warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential burned. tion.
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine Three Way Catalytic Converter
control, and fuel control. The The three way catalytic converter is
powertrain control module (PCM) in in the exhaust system. Through
automatic transmission vehicles or chemical reactions, it converts HC,
the engine control module (ECM) in CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
manual transmission vehicles uses to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
various sensors to determine how (N2), and water vapor.
much air is going into the engine. It
298
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０２
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The three way catalytic converter 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine tuned-up.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
flammables. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
299
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：２５３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０３
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes Make sure the vehicle has been or fifth/sixth (M/T). Do not use
If you take your vehicle for a state parked with the engine off for 6 the cruise control. When traffic
emissions test shortly after the hours or more. allows, drive for 90 seconds
battery has been disconnected or without moving the accelerator
gone dead, it may not pass the test. Make sure the ambient pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness temperature is between 40° and slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
codes’’ that must be set in the on- 95°F. do this for a continuous 90
board diagnostics for the emissions seconds because of traffic
systems. These codes are erased Without touching the accelerator conditions, drive for at least 30
when the battery is disconnected, pedal, start the engine, and let it seconds, then repeat it two more
and set again only after several days idle for 20 seconds. times (for a total of 90 seconds).
of driving under a variety of
conditions. Keep the vehicle in Park Then drive in city/suburban
(automatic transmission) or traffic for at least 10 minutes.
If the testing facility determines that Neutral (manual transmission). When traffic conditions allow, let
the readiness codes are not set, you Increase the engine speed to 2,000 the vehicle coast for several
will be requested to return at a later rpm, and hold it there until the seconds without using the
date to complete the test. If you must temperature gauge rises to at least accelerator pedal or the brake
get the vehicle retested within the 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes). pedal.
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by Select a nearby lightly traveled If the testing facility determines the
doing the following. major highway where you can readiness codes are still not set, see
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph your dealer.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly, (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
but not completely full (around minutes.
3/4). Drive on the highway in D (A/T)
300
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：２８３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０４
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 302
Warranty Coverages ..................... 303
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. vehicles) ............................ 304

Authorized Manuals ...................... 305
301
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：３９３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０５
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
If you encounter a problem that your Vehicle identification number (see
dealership does not solve to your Honda Canada Inc. page 288 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with 715 Milner Avenue
the dealership’s management. The Toronto, ON Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager M1B 2K8 who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Date of purchase
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
If you are dissatisfied with the Toronto (416) 287-4776 Mileage on your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Your name, address, and
Customer Service Office. Islands: telephone number
Bella International
U.S. Owners: P.O. Box 190816 A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. San Juan, PR 00919-0816 problem
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Tel: (787) 620-7028 Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
302
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：５２３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０６
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −

covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Honda accessories are covered all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two under this warranty. Time and 2006 Honda Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s mileage limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are read your warranty booklet for coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your details. tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet.
Warranty − covers all Honda
Original Equipment Battery Limited replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
Warranty − this warranty gives up materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2006 Warranty
to 100 percent credit toward a Manual that came with your vehicle.
replacement battery.
303
０５／０７／２８１４：０７：５７３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０７
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems D.C. 20590.
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or You can also obtain other
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
304
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：１１３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０８
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
61SDA08 2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4 $75.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Service Manual Base Book
Authorized Manuals
61SDA09 2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6 $45.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Service Manual Supplement ２ Name Year Each＊ Price
61SDA08EL 2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4/V6 $50.00 ０
０
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ６
61SDA30 2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4/V6 $44.00
Body Repair Manual Ｈ
Ｏ
31SDN630 2006 Honda Accord 2 door Owner’s Manual $35.00
Ｎ
31SDA730 2006 Honda Accord Navigation System $29.00
Owner’s Manual ＊
Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
31SDAM10 2006 Honda Accord Honda Service History $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
31SDNQ30 2006 Honda Accord 2-door Quick Start Guide $12.00 Add 6% Sales Tax
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
Indicate Year and Model Desired allow adequate time for delivery.
＊ GRAND TOTAL
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
305
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：２３３１ＳＤＰ６３００３０９
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
Customer Name Attention
Ｐ
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
306
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：２９３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１０
Main Menu
Index
A Operation .................................... 209 B

Anti-theft, Audio System............... 172
Accessories..................................... 191 Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 76 Battery
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Armrest ............................................. 85 Charging System
Position) ........................................ 76 Audio System ................................. 124 Indicator............................ 57, 276
Accessory Power Sockets............. 100 AM/FM/CD Player .................. 126 Jump Starting ............................. 272
Adding Engine Coolant ................. 236 AM/FM/CD Changer .............. 136 Maintenance ............................... 260
Additional Information About Your AM/FM/CD Changer with Specifications ..................... 291, 293
Airbags .......................................... 21 navigation system .................. 149 Before Driving ............................... 183
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 233 Automatic Lighting Off Feature .... 70 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 17
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ........ 73 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19 Beverage Holders ............................ 98
Advanced Airbags............................ 25 Automatic Climate Control... 113, 117 Booster Seats ................................... 47
Advice for Pregnant Women .......... 15 Automatic Speed Control.............. 175 Brakes
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21 Automatic Transmission............... 203 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 209
Air Conditioning System ............... 106 Capacity, Fluid ................... 290, 292 Break-in, New Linings .............. 184
Manual System .......................... 108 Checking Fluid Level ........ 239, 240 Fluid ............................................ 243
Automatic System...................... 113 Shifting ........................................ 203 Parking .......................................... 96
Automatic System with Shift Lever Position System Design ........................... 208
navigation system .................. 117 Indicators ................................ 203 System Indicator .................. 58, 278
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 256 Shift Lever Positions ................. 204 Wear Indicators ......................... 208
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 184 Shift Lock Release ..................... 206 Braking System.............................. 208
All Children Should Sit in a Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 184
Back Seat ...................................... 33 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 71
INDEX
Antifreeze ....................................... 236 Brights, Headlights ......................... 69
Indicator ................................ 59, 209 CONTINUED
I
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：３６３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１１
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement Changing Oil Clock ............................................... 173

Back-up Lights ........................... 250 How to ......................................... 233 Clutch Fluid .................................... 244
Front Parking Lights ................. 249 When to....................................... 221 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 297
Headlights .................................. 246 Charging System Indicator .... 57, 276 Coin Pocket .................................... 100
Specifications ..................... 291, 293 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............... 65 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 199
Turn Signal Lights............. 249, 250 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 198 Compact Spare Tire....................... 264
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 246 Child Safety ...................................... 32 Console Compartment .................... 99
Booster Seats ............................... 47 Consumer Information.................. 302
C Child Seats .............................. 32, 39 Controls, Instruments and .............. 53
Important Safety Coolant
Capacities Chart .................... 290, 292 Reminders .......................... 32, 37 Adding ......................................... 236
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 50 Infants ........................................... 37 Checking ..................................... 189
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 193 Larger Children ........................... 46 Proper Solution .......................... 236
Cargo Net ....................................... 196 LATCH.......................................... 41 Temperature Gauge .................... 64
Carrying Cargo .............................. 193 Risks with Airbags....................... 33 Crankcase Emissions Control
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii Small Children.............................. 38 System......................................... 297
CD Care .......................................... 169 Tethers.......................................... 45 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 62
CD Changer ............................141, 155 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33 Cruise Control Operation ............. 175
CD Changer Error Child Seats ........................................ 39 Cruise Main Indicator ..................... 62
Messages .....................133, 146, 160 Installing ....................................... 40 Cup Holders...................................... 98
CD Player........................................ 129 LATCH.......................................... 41 Customer Service Information..... 302
CD Player Error Messages .......... 132 Selecting ....................................... 39
Center CD Pocket ............................ 99 Tether Anchor Points ................. 45 D
Certification Label ......................... 288 Cleaning
Chains, Tires .................................. 259 Seat Belts .................................... 251 DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 265 Climate Control System ........ 113, 117 Dashboard .................................... 3, 54
II
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：４１３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１２
Main Menu
Index
Daytime Running Lights................. 70 Dual Temperature Control ........... 121 Engine

Daytime Running Lights Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 252 Adding Engine Coolant ............. 236
Indicator ........................................ 60 Additives ..................................... 233
Dead Battery .................................. 272 E Changing the Oil and Filter ...... 233
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 304 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 64
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 72 Economy, Fuel ............................... 190 If It Won’t Start .......................... 270
Defrosting the Emergencies................................... 263 Malfunction Indicator
Windows ..................... 111, 115, 120 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 272 Lamp ....................................... 277
Dimensions ............................. 290, 292 Brake System Indicator ............ 278 Oil Life Display .......................... 221
Dimming the Headlights ................ 69 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 265 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 57, 276
Dipstick Charging System Indicator ...... 276 Oil, Synthetic .............................. 233
Automatic Transmission .. 239, 240 Checking the Fuses................... 280 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 232
Engine Oil ........................... 188, 189 Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 71 Overheating................................ 274
Directional Signals ........................... 69 Jump Starting ............................. 272 Specifications ..................... 291, 293
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 208 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 276 Speed Limiter ..................... 202, 205
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 235 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 277 Starting........................................ 199
Door and Trunk Open Monitor ..... 61 Manually Closing Moonroof .... 279 Engine Speed Limiter ........... 202, 205
Doors Overheated Engine ................... 274 Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 184
Locking and Unlocking ............... 77 Towing ........................................ 285 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 297
Power Door Locks ....................... 77 Emergency Brake ............................ 96 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 50
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 294 Emergency Flashers ....................... 71 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Downshifting, Manual Emergency Towing ....................... 285 Belts by ......................................... 15
Emergency Trunk Opener ............. 81
INDEX
Transmission .............................. 200
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Emissions Controls........................ 297
Driving ............................................ 197 Emissions Testing, State .............. 300
Economy ..................................... 190
III
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：４７３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１３
Main Menu
Index
F Fill Door and Cap....................... 185 Gearshift Lever Positions

Gauge ............................................ 64 Automatic Transmission........... 203
Fan Control .................... 108, 114, 119 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 60 Manual Transmission ............... 200
Features .......................................... 105 Octane Requirement ................. 184 Glove Box ......................................... 98
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 185 Oxygenated ................................ 184 Gross Axle Weight Rating
Filters Tank, Refueling ......................... 185 (GAWR) ...................................... 214
Dust and Pollen .......................... 252 Fuel Economy ................................ 190 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Oil ................................................ 233 Fuse Locations ............................... 283 (GVWR) ...................................... 214
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 71 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 280
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 265 H
Fluids G
Automatic Transmission .. 239, 240 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 246
Brake ........................................... 243 Gas Mileage, Improving................ 190 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 71
Clutch .......................................... 244 Gasohol ........................................... 184 Headlights......................................... 69
Manual Transmission ............... 242 Gasoline .......................................... 184 Aiming ......................................... 246
Power Steering........................... 245 Gauge ............................................ 64 Automatic Lighting Off ............... 70
Windshield Washer ................... 238 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 60 Daytime Running Lights............. 70
Folding Rear Seat ............................ 88 Octane Requirement ................. 184 High Beam Indicator ................... 60
Four-way Flashers ........................... 71 Tank, Refueling ......................... 185 Lights On Indicator ..................... 60
Front Airbags ......................... 9, 21, 23 Gas Station Procedures................. 185 Low Beams, Turning on ............. 69
Front Seat ................................... 82, 84 Gauges Reminder Chime .......................... 69
Adjusting................................. 82, 84 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 64 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 246
Heaters.......................................... 90 Fuel ................................................ 64 Turning on .................................... 69
Airbags ...................................... 9, 23 Speedometer ................................ 63 Head Restraints ............................... 87
Fuel .................................................. 184 Tachometer .................................. 63 Heating and Cooling ...................... 106
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 65 Heated Mirrors ................................ 96
IV
０５／０７／２８１４：０８：５５３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１４
Main Menu
Index
Heater, Seat ...................................... 90 Door and Trunk Open................. 61 Information Display ......................... 63
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 199 DRL (Daytime Running Check Fuel Cap............................ 65
HomeLink Universal Lights)....................................... 60 Engine Oil Life ........................... 221
Transceiver................................. 178 High Beam .................................... 60 Maintenance Items .................... 224
Hood, Opening and Closing the ... 186 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 59 Odometer ...................................... 63
Horn................................................... 67 Lights On ...................................... 60 Outside Temperature.................. 65
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 244 Low Fuel ....................................... 60 Tripmeter...................................... 64
Low Oil Pressure ................. 57, 276 Inside Mirror .................................... 95
I Maintenance Minder ................... 61 Inspection, Tire .............................. 256
Malfunction Lamp ............... 57, 277 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 288 Passenger Airbag Off .................. 29 Instrument Panel ............................. 55
If the Engine Overheats ............... 274 Seat Belt Remider .................. 17, 57 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 71
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 270 Security System ........................... 61 Instruments and Controls ............... 53
Ignition Side Airbag Off ............................ 58 Interior Lights ................................ 102
Keys............................................... 74 SRS ................................................ 58 Introduction ......................................... i
Switch ............................................ 76 Turn Signal and Hazard
Timing Control System ............. 298 Warning .................................... 59 J
Immobilizer System......................... 75 VSA (Vehicle Stability
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Assist) ............................... 62, 211 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 267
Indicators .................................... 55, 56 Washer Level＊＊ ........................... 60 Jack, Tire ........................................ 266
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ........ 59, 209 Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 57 Jump Starting ................................. 272
Brake (Parking and Brake Infant Restraint ................................ 37
System) ............................. 58, 278 K
INDEX
Infant Seats ....................................... 37
Charging System ................. 57, 276 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 255
Check Fuel Cap............................ 65 Recommended Pressures ......... 256 Keys ................................................... 74
Cruise Control .............................. 62
V
０５／０７／２８１４：０９：０２３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１５
Main Menu
Index
L Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 193 Operation ...................................... 94

Luggage Net (Cargo Net) ............ 196
Label, Certification ........................ 288 N
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 69 M
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 17 Net, Cargo ...................................... 196
LATCH Anchorage System............ 41 Maintenance ................................... 219 Neutral Gear Position.................... 204
Lighting Off Feature, Automatic ... 70 Owner’s Maintenance New Vehicle Break-in ................... 184
Lights Checks .................................... 226 Normal Shift Speeds...................... 201
Bulb Replacement ..................... 246 Record ......................................... 228 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Indicator .................................. 55, 56 Minder .................................. 66, 221 Numbers, Identification ................ 288
Parking .......................................... 69 Minder Indicator .......................... 61
Turn Signal ................................... 69 Safety........................................... 220 O
Load Limits..................................... 194 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 57, 277
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 76 Manual Transmission.................... 200 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 184
Locks Checking Fluid Level ................ 242 Odometer .......................................... 63
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 76 Reverse Lockout ........................ 202 Oil
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 185 Shifting ........................................ 200 Change, How to ......................... 233
Glove Box ..................................... 98 Manual Transmission Change, When to ....................... 221
Power Door .................................. 77 Fluid ............................................ 242 Checking Engine ....................... 188
Trunk ............................................ 81 Mats, Floor ..................................... 251 Pressure Indicator ............... 57, 276
Low Coolant Level ................. 189, 236 Meters, Gauges ................................ 63 Selecting Proper Viscosity
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 60 Methanol in Gasoline .................... 184 Chart ....................................... 233
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 57, 276 Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 95 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 76
Lower Anchors................................. 41 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 192 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Lubricant Specifications Moonroof .......................................... 94 Recovery ..................................... 297
Chart ................................... 290, 292 Closing Manually ....................... 279 Outside Mirrors ............................... 95
VI
０５／０７／２８１４：０９：０９３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１６
Main Menu
Index
Outside Temperature ...................... 65 Power Door Locks ........................... 77 Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 88
Overheating, Engine ..................... 274 Power Socket Locations................ 100 Rear View Mirror ............................. 95
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 226 Power Steering Fluid ..................... 245 Rear Window Defogger .................. 72
Oxygenated Fuel ........................... 184 Power Windows ............................... 91 Reclining the Seat Backs .......... 82, 84
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 15 Recommended Shift
P Preparing to Drive ......................... 198 Speeds ......................................... 201
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 Recommended Tire Pressures .... 256
Panel Brightness Control ............... 71 Additional Safety Precautions .... 16 Refueling ......................................... 185
Park Gear Position......................... 204 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 15 Reminder Indicators.................. 55, 56
Parking ............................................ 207 Protecting Children ................... 32, 37 Remote Transmitter ........................ 78
Parking Brake .................................. 96 Protecting Infants ........................ 37 Replacement Information
Parking Brake and Brake System Protecting Larger Children ........ 46 Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 252
Indicator ................................ 58, 278 Protecting Small Children .......... 38 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 233
Parking Lights.................................. 69 Using Child Seats with Fuses ........................................... 280
Parking Over Things that Tethers...................................... 45 Light Bulbs ................................. 246
Burn............................................. 299 Using LATCH .............................. 41 Schedule ..................................... 221
Passenger Airbag Off Tires and Wheels ....................... 258
Indicator ........................................ 29 R Wiper Blades .............................. 252
PGM-FI System.............................. 298 Replacing Seat Belts After a
Playing the, Radiator Overheating .................... 274 Crash ............................................. 20
AM/FM Radio ........... 126, 136, 150 Radio/CD Sound Reporting Safety Defects＊ ........... 304
XM Saterllite Radio＊ ....... 139, 153 System......................................... 124 Reserve Tank, Engine
CDs.............................. 129, 141, 155 Radio Theft Protection.................. 172 Coolant ................................ 189, 236
INDEX
Tape ............................ 134, 147, 161 Readiness Codes ............................ 277 Restraint, Child ................................ 32
Pocket, Coin ................................... 100 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 250
Pollen Filter .................................... 252 Rear Seat Access ............................. 85 CONTINUED
VII
０５／０７／２８１４：０９：１４３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１７
Main Menu
Index
Reverse Gear Position................... 204 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Sound System ................................. 124
Reverse Lockout ............................ 202 Belt ...................................... 14, 17 Spare Tire
Roof Rack ....................................... 195 Seat Heaters ..................................... 90 Inflating ....................................... 264
Rotation, Tire ................................. 257 Seats .................................................. 82 Specifications ..................... 291, 293
Seats, Folding Rear.......................... 88 Spark Plugs............................. 291, 293
S Security System ............................. 174 Specifications ......................... 290, 292
Select/Reset Knob ..................... 63,71 Speed Control ................................. 175
Safety Belts................................... 8, 17 Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39 Speed Limiter ......................... 202, 205
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 304 Serial Number ................................ 288 SRS, Additional Information........... 21
Safety Features .................................. 7 Service Intervals ............................ 227 Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Airbags ...................................... 9, 21 Service Manual＊ ............................ 305 Airbag Service .............................. 30
Seat Belts .................................. 8, 17 Service Station Procedures .......... 185 Airbag System Components ....... 21
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 51 Setting the Clock ........................... 173 How the Passenger Airbag Off
Safety Messages ................................ ii Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 203 Indicator Works ....................... 29
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 17 Shift Lock Release ......................... 206 How the Side Airbags Off
Additional Information ................ 17 Side Airbags ..................................... 26 Indicator Works ....................... 29
Automatic Seat Belt How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28
Tensioners ................................ 19 How the Side Airbag Off How Your Front Airbags
Cleaning ...................................... 251 Indicator Works ....................... 29 Work.......................................... 23
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 17 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 28 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
Maintenance ................................. 19 How Your Side Curtain How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Reminder Indicator and Airbags Work ........................... 28 Work.......................................... 28
Beeper ................................. 17, 57 Signaling Turns ................................ 69 SRS Indicator.............................. 28, 58
System Components.................... 17 Snow Chains ................................... 259 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 76
Use During Pregnancy................ 15 Snow Tires ...................................... 259
Socket, Accessory Power ............. 100
VIII
０５／０７／２８１４：０９：２０３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１８
Main Menu
Index
Starting the Engine........................ 199 Emissions Control Systems ...... 297 Labeling ...................................... 296
In Cold Weather at High Oxygenated Fuels...................... 184 Maintenance ............................... 257
Altitude ................................... 199 Three Way Catalytic Replacing .................................... 258
With a Dead Battery ................. 272 Converter........................ 298, 299 Rotating....................................... 257
State Emissions Testing ............... 300 Temperature Control, Dual .......... 121 Snow ............................................ 259
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 274 Temperature Gauge ........................ 64 Specifications ..................... 291, 293
Steering Wheel Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 123 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 265
Adjustment ................................... 73 Temperature, Outside ..................... 65 Towing
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 76 Tether Anchor Points...................... 45 A Trailer ...................................... 213
Steering Wheel Buttons........ 171, 175 Theft Protection, Radio................. 172 Emergency Wrecker ................. 285
Stereo Sound System .................... 124 Three Way Catalytic Equipment and Accessories ..... 215
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 262 Converter ............................ 298, 299 Tips .............................................. 217
Sun Visor......................................... 101 Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 73 Weight Limit ...................... 213, 214
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 102 Time, Setting the ........................... 173 Trailer Loading .............................. 213
Supplemental Restraint System Timing Belt ..................................... 246 Trailer Towing Tips....................... 217
Servicing ....................................... 30 Tire Chains ..................................... 259 Transmission
SRS Indicator.......................... 28, 58 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 265 Checking Fluid Level,
System Components.................... 21 Tire Information ............................ 296 Automatic ....................... 239, 240
Synthetic Oil ................................... 233 Tires ................................................ 254 Checking Fluid Level,
Air Pressure ............................... 256 Manual .................................... 242
T Chains ......................................... 259 Fluid Selection ................... 240, 241
Checking Wear .......................... 257 Identification Number............... 288
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 250 Compact Spare ........................... 264
INDEX
Shifting the Automatic .............. 203
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 263 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 294 Shifting the Manual ................... 200
Technical Descriptions Inflation ....................................... 255
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 294 Inspection ................................... 256 CONTINUED
IX
０５／０７／２８１４：０９：２８３１ＳＤＰ６３００３１９
Main Menu
Index
Treadwear＊ .................................... 294 Nut Wrench ................................ 266

Treadwear Indicators .................... 257 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Replacing .................................... 258
Trip Meter ........................................ 64 System.................................... 211 Windows
Trunk................................................. 81 VSA System Indicator ......... 62, 211 Auto Reverse ................................ 92
Cargo Net ................................... 196 VSA Activation Indicator .... 62, 211 Operating the Power ................... 91
Emergency Opener ..................... 81 VSA Off Switch .......................... 212 Rear, Defogger ............................ 72
Hooks .......................................... 196 Vehicle Storage .............................. 262 Windshield
Opening the .................................. 81 Ventilation ...................................... 110 Cleaning ........................................ 68
Open Monitor Indicator .............. 61 VIN .................................................. 288 Defroster .................... 111, 115, 120
Turn Signals ..................................... 69 Viscosity, Oil................................... 233 Washers ........................................ 68
Voice Control System............ 117, 149 Wipers, Windshield
U Changing Blades ........................ 252
W Operation ...................................... 68
Unexpected, Taking Care Worn Tires ..................................... 257
of the ........................................... 263 WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 285
Uniform Tire Quality Grading＊ ... 294 Warning Button, Hazard ................. 71
＊
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 184 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 51 : U.S. only
＊＊
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 235 Warranty Coverages ..................... 303 : Canada only
Using a Booster Seat ....................... 47 Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 238
V Level Indicator＊＊ ......................... 60
Operation ...................................... 68
Vanity Mirror ................................. 101 Wheels
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 194 Adjusting the Steering ................ 73
Vehicle Dimensions .............. 290, 292 Alignment and Balance ............. 257
Vehicle Identification Number..... 288 Compact Spare ........................... 264
X
０５／０７／２８１４：０９：５２３１ＳＤＰ６３００３２０
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Manual Transmission Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Manual Transmission All 4-cylinder models except
number of 87 or higher. Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 Canadian LX
or 10W-40 motor oil as a Front:
Fuel Tank Capacity: temporary replacement (see 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) pages 242 and 243 ). Rear:
Capacity: 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Recommended Engine Oil: 5-speed manual transmission:
API Premium grade 5W-20 2.0 US qt (1.9 ) Canadian 4-cylinder LX
detergent oil (see page 232 ). 6-speed manual transmission: Front:
2.3 US qt (2.2 ) 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including Rear:
filter): Power Steering Fluid: 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
4-cylinder models Honda Power Steering Fluid
4.4 US qt (4.2 ) preferred, or another brand of All V6 models
6-cylinder models power steering fluid as a Front:
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) temporary replacement. Do not 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
use ATF (see page 245 ). Rear:
Automatic Transmission Fluid: 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Brake Fluid:
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid Spare Tire Pressure:
a DEXRON III ATF as a DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
temporary replacement (see DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
pages 240 and 241 ). replacement (see page 244 ).

Manual 2006 Accord Coupe

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual 2006 Accord Coupe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual

Owner's Identification Form

OWNER This owner’s manual should be

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

A Few Words About Safety

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.55,56)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

POWER DOOR LOCK

FUEL FILL DOOR(P.185)/

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS PASSENGER

VEHICLE STABILITY TILT/TELESCOPIC SEAT HEATERS＊2

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Driver and Passenger Safety

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For information on how to clean your

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes: